Integra Stereo Receiver DHC 99 User Manual

AV Controller  
DHC-9.9  
Instruction Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Precautions  
1. Recording Copyright—Unless it’s for personal use  
only, recording copyrighted material is illegal with-  
out the permission of the copyright holder.  
For U.S. models  
FCC Information for User  
CAUTION:  
2. AC Fuse—The AC fuse inside the unit is not user-  
serviceable. If you cannot turn on the unit, contact  
your Onkyo dealer from whom you purchased this  
unit.  
The user changes or modifications not expressly  
approved by the party responsible for compliance could  
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.  
3. Care—Occasionally you should dust the unit all  
over with a soft cloth. For stubborn stains, use a soft  
cloth dampened with a weak solution of mild deter-  
gent and water. Dry the unit immediately afterwards  
with a clean cloth. Don’t use abrasive cloths, thin-  
ners, alcohol, or other chemical solvents, because  
they may damage the finish or remove the panel let-  
tering.  
NOTE:  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply  
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to  
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to  
provide reasonable protection against harmful interfer-  
ence in a residential installation.  
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio  
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accor-  
dance with the instructions, may cause harmful interfer-  
ence to radio communications. However, there is no  
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular  
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful inter-  
ference to radio or television reception, which can be  
determined by turning the equipment off and on, the  
user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by  
one or more of the following measures:  
4. Power  
WARNING  
BEFORE PLUGGING IN THE UNIT FOR THE  
FIRST TIME, READ THE FOLLOWING SEC-  
TION CAREFULLY.  
AC outlet voltages vary from country to country.  
Make sure that the voltage in your area meets the  
voltage requirements printed on the unit’s rear panel  
(e.g., AC 230 V, 50 Hz or AC 120 V, 60 Hz).  
The power cord plug is used to disconnect this unit  
from the AC power source. Make sure that the plug  
is readily operable (easily accessible) at all times.  
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
Increase the separation between the equipment and  
receiver.  
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit dif-  
ferent from that to which the receiver is connected.  
For North American model  
Pressing the [On/Standby] button to select Standby  
mode does not fully shutdown the unit. If you do not  
intend to use the unit for an extended period,  
remove the power cord from the AC outlet.  
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV techni-  
cian for help.  
5. Preventing Hearing Loss  
Caution  
For Canadian Models  
NOTE: THIS CLASS B DIGITAL APPARATUS  
COMPLIES WITH CANADIAN ICES-003.  
For models having a power cord with a polarized plug:  
CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK,  
MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT,  
FULLY INSERT.  
Excessive sound pressure from earphones and head-  
phones can cause hearing loss.  
6. Batteries and Heat Exposure  
Warning  
Batteries (battery pack or batteries installed) shall  
not be exposed to excessive heat as sunshine, fire or  
the like.  
7. Never Touch this Unit with Wet Hands—Never  
handle this unit or its power cord while your hands  
are wet or damp. If water or any other liquid gets  
inside this unit, have it checked by your Onkyo  
dealer.  
Modèle pour les canadien  
REMARQUE: CET APPAREIL NUMÉRIQUE DE  
LA CLASSE B EST CONFORME À LA NORME  
NMB-003 DU CANADA.  
Sur les modèles dont la fiche est polarisée:  
ATTENTION: POUR ÉVITER LES CHOCS ÉLEC-  
TRIQUES, INTRODUIRE LA LAME LA PLUS  
LARGE DE LA FICHE DANS LA BORNE CORRE-  
SPONDANTE DE LA PRISE ET POUSSER  
JUSQU’AU FOND.  
8. Handling Notes  
• If you need to transport this unit, use the original  
packaging to pack it how it was when you origi-  
nally bought it.  
• Do not leave rubber or plastic items on this unit  
for a long time, because they may leave marks on  
the case.  
• This unit’s top and rear panels may get warm  
after prolonged use. This is normal.  
• If you do not use this unit for a long time, it may  
not work properly the next time you turn it on, so  
be sure to use it occasionally.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Supplied Accessories  
Make sure you have the following accessories:  
Remote controller and three batteries (AA/R6)  
Speaker setup microphone  
Indoor FM antenna  
AM loop antenna  
Power cord  
(Power cord varies from country to country.)  
*
In catalogs and on packaging, the letter at the end of the product  
name indicates the color. Specifications and operation are the  
same regardless of color.  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Introduction  
Aiming the Remote Controller ..................................15  
About the Remote Controller Modes .........................16  
Receiver/Tape Mode ..................................................16  
DVD Mode ................................................................18  
Adjusting the Bass & Treble ..................................... 66  
Listening to AM/FM Stations .................................... 67  
Listening to HD Radio™ Stations  
(North American Model Only) ............................... 74  
Listening to SIRIUS Satellite Radio®  
About AV Connections ..............................................28  
Which Connections Should I Use? ............................29  
Connecting a DVD player ..........................................32  
Using the Listening Modes  
Miscellaneous Setup ................................................ 123  
Hardware Setup ....................................................... 125  
Terrestrial Set-top box, or Other Video Source ......36  
Connecting a CD Player or Turntable ........................41  
Connecting the Power Cords of Other Components  
(North American model only) .................................43  
Turning On the AV Controller ............................ 45  
Connecting Zone 2 .................................................. 130  
Connecting Zone 3 .................................................. 131  
Zone 2/Zone 3 Out Settings ..................................... 132  
First Time Setup  
Analog Audio Input Setup .........................................54  
Speaker Settings .........................................................55  
TV Format Setup (not North American models) .......56  
AM Frequency Step Setup (on some models) ...........57  
Changing the Input Display .......................................57  
Automatic Speaker Setup  
Controlling Other Components  
Controlling Other Components ....................... 137  
Learning Commands ............................................... 140  
Using Macros ........................................................... 141  
Others  
Troubleshooting ............................................... 142  
Specifications ................................................... 147  
(Audyssey MultEQ® XT) .......................................58  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Features  
*1  
Processing  
• HDMI Audio and Video Processing (Deep Color,  
x.v.Color, Lip Sync, DTS -HD Master Audio,  
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #’s: 5,451,942;  
5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,226,616; 6,487,535 &  
other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending.  
DTS is a registered trademark and the DTS logos, Symbol,  
DTS-HD and DTS-HD Master Audio are trademarks of DTS,  
Inc. ©1996-2007 DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.  
*1  
*2  
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, Dolby TrueHD ,  
Dolby Digital Plus, SA-CD and Multi-CH PCM)  
*3  
• THX Ultra2 Plus Certified  
• HQV-Reon-VX Video Processing with 1080p Video  
Upscaling of All Video Sources via HDMI  
*2  
*3  
• Component Video Upconversion  
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.  
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic” and the double-D symbol are trademarks  
of Dolby Laboratories.  
• Burr-Brown 192 kHz/24-bit D/A Converters  
• Three-TI (Aureus) 32-Bit DSP Chips  
*4  
• Neural Surround , THX-Neural  
*5  
• Theater-Dimensional virtual surround sound  
THX and Ultra2 Plus are trademarks of THX Ltd. THX may be  
registered in some jurisdictions. All rights reserved. Surround  
EX is a trademark of Dolby Laboratories. Used with permis-  
sion.  
• DSD Direct  
*6  
• Re-EQ function  
*4  
*5  
Connections  
• Balanced XLR stereo input  
Neural Surround is a trademark owned by Neural Audio Cor-  
poration, THX is a trademark of THX Ltd., which may be reg-  
istered in some jurisdictions. All rights reserved.  
• Balanced XLR 7.1-channel preouts, with front bi-  
amping capability  
*7  
• 4 HDMI Inputs and 2 Outputs  
• Onkyo  
for System Control  
Theater-Dimensional is a trademark of Onkyo Corporation.  
• 6 Digital Inputs (3 Optical / 3 Coaxial),  
1 Output (Optical)  
*6 Re-Equalization and the “Re-EQ” logo are trademarks of THX  
Ltd.  
• 6 S-Video Inputs / 2 Outputs  
*7  
• Component Video Switching (3 Inputs/2 Outputs)  
• Zone 2 and Zone 3 Pre Out, and subwoofer preouts  
• IR Input/Output and 12 V Trigger  
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High Definition Multimedia Inter-  
face are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licens-  
ing, LLC.  
*8  
• RS232 Port for Interface Control  
©2005 SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc. “SIRIUS”, SiriusConnect,  
the SIRIUS dog logo, channel names and logos are trademarks  
of SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc. Available only in the contiguous  
United States (excluding Alaska and Hawaii) and Canada.  
Miscellaneous  
*8  
*9  
• SIRIUS Ready / XM Ready with XMHD Sur-  
round (North American models only)  
*9  
*10  
• HD Radio reception (North American models  
only)  
®
XM Ready is a trademark of XM Satellite Radio Inc. ©2005  
• 40 SIRIUS/XM/AM/FM Presets (North American  
models)  
XM Satellite Radio Inc. All rights reserved.  
*10  
• 40 AM/FM Presets (European and Asian models)  
*11  
HD Radio Technology Manufactured Under License From  
• Music Optimizer for Compressed Music Files  
iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and Foreign Patents.  
HD Radio™ and the HD Radio logo are proprietary trademarks  
of iBiquity Digital Corp.  
®
*12  
Audyssey MultEQ XT to Correct Room Acoustic  
Problems  
*12  
• Audyssey Dynamic EQ  
Loudness Correction  
*11 Music Optimizer™ is a trademark of Onkyo Corporation.  
*12  
• Audyssey Dynamic Volume  
*12  
• Independent Crossover Adjustment  
(40/45/50/55/60/70/80/90/100/110/120/130/150/200  
Hz)  
Manufactured under license from Audyssey Laboratories. U.S.  
®
and foreign patents pending. Audyssey MultEQ XT,  
• ISF (Imaging Science Foundation) Video Calibration  
• Newly Designed GUI for System Set-up  
• Compatible with RI Dock for iPod  
Audyssey Dynamic Volume , and Audyssey Dynamic EQ  
are trademark of Audyssey Laboratories.  
• Preprogrammed u-Compatible Remote with 3 Mac-  
ros and Mode-Key LEDs  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Features—Continued  
THX Ultra2 Plus  
Before any home theater component can be THX  
Ultra2 Plus certified, it must pass a rigorous series of  
quality and performance tests. Only then can a prod-  
uct feature the THX Ultra2 Plus logo, which is your  
guarantee that the Home Theater products you pur-  
chase will give you superb performance for many  
years to come. THX Ultra2 Plus requirements define  
hundreds of parameters, including power amplifier  
performance, and pre-amplifier performance and  
operation for both digital and analog domains. THX  
Ultra2 Plus receivers also feature proprietary THX  
technologies (e.g., THX Mode) which accurately  
translate movie soundtracks for home theater play-  
back.  
*
*
*
“Xantech” is a registered trademark of Xantech Corporation.  
“Niles” is a registered trademark of Niles Audio Corporation.  
Apple and iPod are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the  
U.S. and other countries.  
*
“x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.  
This product incorporates copyright protection technol-  
ogy that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellec-  
tual property rights. Use of this copyright protection  
technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corpora-  
tion, and is intended for home and other limited con-  
sumer uses only unless otherwise authorized by  
Macrovision. Reverse engineering or disassembly is pro-  
hibited.  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Multiroom Capability  
You can use three speaker systems with this AV controller—a surround-sound speaker system (up to 7.1 channels)  
in your main listening room, a stereo speaker system in a second room, or Zone 2, as we call it, and another stereo  
speaker system in a third room that we call Zone 3. And, you can select a different audio source for each room.  
Main Room: In your main listening room, you can enjoy up to 7.1-channel playback (see pages 21–25).  
You can enjoy the various listening modes such as Dolby, DTS, and THX (see pages 90–100).  
Zone 2: In your Zone 2 room, you can enjoy 2-channel stereo playback and video playback (see page 130).  
*The listening modes cannot be used with Zone 2 and Zone 3.  
*External power amplifier required.  
Zone 3: In your Zone 3 room, you can enjoy 2-channel stereo playback (see page 131).  
*The listening modes cannot be used with Zone 2 and Zone 3.  
*External power amplifier required.  
Main Room  
Surround back left and right  
speakers  
Front left and right speakers  
Subwoofer  
Center speaker  
Surround left and right speakers  
Zone 2 Room  
Zone 3 Room  
Left and right  
stereo speakers  
Left and right  
stereo speakers  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Front & Rear Panels  
Front Panel  
North American model  
1 2 3 4  
5
6
7 8 9 bk bl bm bn bo  
bp  
bq br bs bt  
ck  
cl  
cmcn  
co  
Other models  
9
The actual front panel has various logos printed on it. They are not shown here for clarity.  
The page numbers in parentheses show where you can find the main explanation for each item.  
a On/Standby button (45)  
c Zone 2 indicator (133)  
Sets the AV controller to On or Standby.  
This indicator lights up when Zone 2 is selected.  
d Zone 3 indicator (133)  
b Standby indicator (45)  
This indicator lights up when Zone 3 is selected.  
Lights up when the AV controller is on Standby and  
flashes while a signal is being received from the  
remote controller.  
e Remote-control sensor (15)  
Receives control signals from the remote controller.  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Front & Rear Panels—Continued  
f Stereo button (90)  
s Audio Selector button (129)  
Selects the audio input: analog, digital, HDMI, or  
multichannel.  
g Listening Mode [e]/[r] buttons (90)  
Select the Onkyo original listening modes.  
t Tone, Plus [+], and Minus [–] buttons (66,  
134)  
h Display  
Used to adjust the tone (bass and treble), and the  
volume and balance of Zone 2 and Zone 3.  
i Dimmer (RT/PTY/TP) button (65, 73)  
u Input selector buttons (64)  
This button is used to adjust the display brightness.  
Select the following input sources: DVD,  
Other models, this is the [RT/PTY/TP] button, and  
it’s for RDS (Radio Data System). See “Using  
RDS” on page 72.  
VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT, Game/TV, AUX 1, AUX 2,  
Tape, Tuner, CD, Phono.  
v Return button  
j Memory button (69)  
Selects the previously displayed onscreen setup  
menu.  
Used when storing or deleting radio presets.  
k Tuning Mode button (67)  
w Setup Mic (59)  
Selects the Auto or Manual tuning mode.  
The included speaker setup microphone is con-  
nected here for automatic speaker setup.  
l Display button (66)  
Displays various information about the currently  
selected input source.  
x AUX 2 Input (40, 89)  
Used to connect a camcorder, game console, and so  
on. There are input jacks for optical digital audio,  
S-Video, composite video, and analog audio.  
m Setup button  
This button is used to access the onscreen setup  
menus that appear on the connected TV.  
n Tuning, Preset, Arrow, and Enter buttons  
When the AM or FM input source is selected, the  
TUNING [q]/[w] buttons are used to tune the tuner,  
and the PRESET [e]/[r] buttons are used to select  
radio presets (see page 69).  
When the onscreen setup menus are used, they work  
as arrow buttons and are used to select and set  
items. The [Enter] button is also used with the  
onscreen setup menus.  
o Master Volume control (64)  
Sets the volume of the AV controller to dB,  
–81.5 dB through +18.0 dB (relative display).  
The volume level can also be displayed as an abso-  
lute value. See “Volume Setup” on page 123.  
p Zone 2, Zone 3, Level [q]/[w], and Off  
buttons (133, 134)  
The Zone 2 button is used when setting Zone 2.  
The Zone 3 button is used when setting Zone 3.  
The Level Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons are used  
when adjusting the volume level of Zone 2 or Zone  
3.  
The Off button is used to turn off Zone 2 or Zone 3.  
q Phones jack (66)  
This 1/4-inch phone jack is for connecting a stan-  
dard pair of stereo headphones for private listening.  
r HDMI Out button (46)  
Used to set the “Monitor Out” setting.  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Front & Rear Panels—Continued  
Display  
1
2
3
4
bk  
5
6
7
8
9
For detailed information, see the pages in parentheses.  
a Speaker/channel indicators (97)  
Indicate the speaker configuration and channels  
used by the current input source.  
e Audyssey indicator (58)  
Flashes during automatic speaker setup. Lights up  
when the “Equalizer Settings” is set to “Audyssey”.  
: A box is displayed for each speaker that’s set  
in the Speaker Configuration. No box appears for  
speakers that are set to No or None.  
f Headphone indicator (66)  
Lights up when a pair of headphones are plugged  
into the Phones jack.  
The following abbreviations indicate which audio  
channels are included in the current input signal.  
g Message area  
Displays various information.  
FL: Front left  
h Audio input indicators (70, 129)  
C:  
Center  
Indicate the type of audio input that’s selected as the  
audio source: HDMI, ANALOG, or DIGITAL.  
FR: Front right  
SL: Surround left  
LFE: Subwoofer (Low Frequency Effects)  
SR: Surround right  
SBL: Surround back left  
SB: Surround back  
While a digital HD Radio transmission is being  
received, the DIGITAL indicator lights up. While an  
analog HD Radio transmission is being received,  
the ANALOG indicator lights up.  
SBR: Surround back right  
i Volume level (64)  
b Listening mode and format indicators (90)  
Show the selected listening mode and audio input  
signal format.  
Displays the volume level.  
j MUTING indicator (65)  
Flashes while the AV controller is muted.  
c Tuning indicators  
HD (North American model only) (70): Lights  
up if the current AM or FM station supports HD  
Radio technology.  
SPS (North American model only) (71):  
Lights up when tuned to a HD Radio station that’s  
transmitting secondary multicast channels.  
RDS (72): Lights up when tuned to a radio station  
AUTO (67): Lights up when Auto Tuning mode is  
selected for AM or FM radio. Goes off when Man-  
ual Tuning mode is selected.  
TUNED (67): Lights up when tuned to a radio sta-  
tion.  
FM STEREO (67): Lights up when tuned to a ste-  
reo FM station.  
d SLEEP indicator (66)  
Lights up when the Sleep function has been set.  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Front & Rear Panels—Continued  
Rear Panel  
North American model  
bl  
bs  
1 2  
3
4 5  
6
78  
9
bk  
bo bp  
bq  
br  
bt ck cl cm cn co cp cq crcs ct dk dl  
dm  
dn  
do  
Other models  
bm  
bn  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Front & Rear Panels—Continued  
a u REMOTE CONTROL  
l AM ANTENNA (not North American model)  
These push terminals are for connecting an AM  
antenna.  
This u (Remote Interactive) jack can be con-  
nected to the u jack on another u-capable  
Onkyo component for remote and system control.  
m FM ANTENNA (not North American model)  
This jack is for connecting an FM antenna.  
To use u, you must make an analog audio connec-  
tion (RCA) between the AV controller and the other  
component, even if they are connected digitally.  
n IR IN A/B and OUT  
A commercially available IR receiver can be con-  
nected to the IR IN A or B jack, allowing you to  
control the AV controller while you’re in Zone 2, or  
control it when it’s out of sight, for example,  
installed in a cabinet.  
b RS232  
This port is for connecting the AV controller to  
home automation equipment and external control-  
lers.  
A commercially available IR emitter can be con-  
nected to the IR OUT jack to pass IR (infrared)  
remote control signals through to other components.  
c PHONO IN  
This audio input is for connecting a turntable.  
d COMPONENT VIDEO IN 1, 2, and 3  
These RCA component video inputs are for con-  
necting components with a component video out-  
put, such as a DVD player, DVD recorder, or DVR  
(digital video recorder). They’re assignable, which  
means you can assign each one to an input selector  
to suit your setup. See “Component Video Setup”  
on page 52.  
o 12V TRIGGER OUT (A/B/C)  
These outputs can be connected to the 12-volt trig-  
ger inputs on other components.  
p ETHERNET port  
This port is for connecting the AV controller to  
home automation equipment and external control-  
lers.  
Use only shielded Ethernet cables.  
e COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT 1  
This RCA component video output is for connect-  
ing a TV or projector with a component video input.  
q AM and FM ANTENNA (HD Radio reception)  
(on North American model)  
The AM push terminals are for connecting an AM  
antenna. The FM jack is for connecting an FM  
antenna.  
f COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR  
OUT 2/ZONE 2 OUT  
This RCA component video output is for connect-  
ing a TV or projector with a component video input  
located in your main listening room or Zone 2.  
r AC INLET  
The supplied power cord is connected here. The  
other end of the power cord should be connected to  
a suitable wall outlet.  
g HDMI IN 1–4, OUT MAIN, and OUT SUB  
HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) con-  
nections carry digital audio and digital video.  
s DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 1, 2, and 3  
ing components with a coaxial digital audio output,  
such as a CD player or DVD player. They’re assign-  
able, which means you can assign each one to an  
input selector to suit your setup. See “Digital Audio  
Input Setup” on page 53.  
with an HDMI output, such as a DVD player, DVD  
recorder, or DVR (digital video recorder). They’re  
assignable, which means you can assign each one to  
an input selector to suit your setup. See “Video  
Input Setup” on page 50.  
The HDMI outputs are for connecting a TV or pro-  
jector with an HDMI input.  
t DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 1, 2, and OUT  
components with an optical digital audio output,  
such as a CD player or DVD player. They’re assign-  
able, which means you can assign each one to an  
input selector to suit your setup. See “Digital Audio  
Input Setup” on page 53.  
h SIRIUS antenna (on North American model)  
This jack is for connecting a SIRIUS digital  
antenna, sold separately (see the separate SIRIUS  
instructions).  
i XM antenna (on North American model)  
This jack is for connecting an XM Mini-Tuner and  
Home Dock, sold separately (see the separate XM  
instructions).  
The optical digital audio output is for connecting a  
digital recorder with an optical digital input, such as  
a CD recorder.  
j MONITOR OUT  
u GND screw  
The S-Video or composite video jack should be  
connected to a video input on your TV or projector.  
This screw is for connecting a turntable’s ground  
wire.  
k ZONE 2 OUT  
This composite video output can be connected to a  
video input on a TV in Zone 2.  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Front & Rear Panels—Continued  
v BALANCE L/R INPUT  
dm PRE OUT: FRONT L/R, CENTER,  
SUBWOOFER, SURR L/R, and SURR BACK  
L/R  
This balanced XLR input is for connecting a com-  
ponent with a stereo balanced XLR output. For a  
mono source, connect to the BALANCE L XLR.  
This 5.1/7.1 multichannel analog audio output can  
be connected to the analog audio input on a multi-  
channel power amplifier. The SUBWOOFER jack  
is for connecting a powered subwoofer.  
w CD IN  
This analog audio input is for connecting a CD  
player’s analog audio output.  
dn PRE OUT: Zone 2, Zone 3  
x TAPE IN/OUT  
These analog audio outputs can be connected to the  
line inputs on amplifiers in Zone 2 and Zone 3. The  
SW jacks can be connected to the inputs on pow-  
ered subwoofers in Zone 2 and Zone 3.  
These analog audio input and output jacks are for  
connecting a recorder with an analog audio input  
and output, such as a cassette deck, MD recorder,  
etc.  
do AC OUTLET (North American model only)  
These switched AC outlets can be used to supply  
power to other AV components. The type and num-  
ber of outlets depends on the country in which you  
purchased your AV controller.  
y AUX 1 IN  
A VCR for playback only or other video source can  
be connected here. There’s S-Video and composite  
video input jacks for connecting the video signal.  
z GAME/TV IN  
A game console or TV output can be connected  
here. There’s S-Video and composite video input  
jacks for connecting the video signal.  
cr CBL/SAT IN  
A cable or satellite receiver can be connected here.  
There’s S-Video and composite video input jacks  
for connecting the video signal.  
See pages 21–44 for hookup information.  
cs VCR/DVR IN/OUT  
A video component, such as a VCR or DVR, can be  
connected here for recording and playback. There’s  
S-Video and composite video input and output jacks  
for connecting the video signal.  
ct DVD IN  
This input is for connecting a DVD player. There’s  
S-Video and composite video input jacks for con-  
necting the video signal.  
dk FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURR L/R, SURR  
BACK L/R and SUBWOOFER PREOUT  
These balanced XLR outputs are for connecting a  
multichannel power amplifier and powered sub-  
woofer.  
The FRONT L/R and SURR BACK L/R outputs can  
be used with front speakers and surround back  
speakers, respectively, or used to bi-amp the front  
speakers. See “Bi-amping the Front Speakers” on  
page 25.  
dl MULTI CH input: FRONT L/R, CENTER,  
SUBWOOFER, SURR L/R, and SURR BACK  
L/R  
This analog multichannel input is for connecting a  
component with a 5.1/7.1-channel analog audio out-  
put, such as a DVD player, DVD-Audio or  
SACD-capable player, or an MPEG decoder.  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remote Controller  
Installing the Batteries  
Aiming the Remote Controller  
When using the remote controller, point it toward the AV  
controller’s remote control sensor, as shown below.  
To open the battery compartment, press  
the small hollow and slide open the cover.  
1
Remote control sensor  
Standby indicator  
AV controller  
30˚  
30˚  
Insert the three supplied batteries (AA/R6)  
2
in accordance with the polarity diagram  
inside the battery compartment.  
Approx. 16 ft.  
(5 m)  
Notes:  
• The remote controller may not work reliably if the AV  
controller is subjected to bright light, such as direct  
sunlight or inverter-type fluorescent lights. Keep this  
in mind when installing.  
• If another remote controller of the same type is used in  
the same room, or the AV controller is installed close  
to equipment that uses infrared rays, the remote con-  
troller may not work reliably.  
Slide the cover shut.  
3
• Don’t put anything on top of the remote controller,  
such as a book or magazine, because a button may be  
pressed continuously, thereby draining the batteries.  
• The remote controller may not work reliably if the AV  
controller is installed in a rack behind colored glass  
doors. Keep this in mind when installing.  
• The remote controller will not work if there’s an  
obstacle between it and the AV controller’s remote  
control sensor.  
Notes:  
• If the remote controller doesn’t work reliably, try  
replacing the batteries.  
• Don’t mix new and old batteries or different types of  
batteries.  
• If you intend not to use the remote controller for a long  
time, remove the batteries to prevent damage from  
leakage or corrosion.  
• Expired batteries should be removed as soon as possi-  
ble to prevent damage from leakage or corrosion.  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Remote Controller—Continued  
About the Remote Controller Modes  
Receiver/Tape Mode  
As well as the AV controller, you can also use the remote  
controller to control your other AV components. The  
remote controller has a specific operating mode for use  
with each type of component. Modes are selected by  
using the Remote Mode buttons.  
Receiver/Tape mode is used to control the AV controller.  
It can also be used to control an Onkyo cassette recorder  
connected via u.  
To set the remote controller to Receiver/Tape mode,  
press the [Receiver] Remote Mode button.  
Receiver/Tape Mode  
In Receiver/Tape mode, you can control the AV control-  
ler and an Onkyo cassette recorder connected via u.  
1
On  
Standby  
TV  
DVD Mode  
Input  
2
3
By default, you can control an Integra/Onkyo DVD  
player in this mode. By entering the appropriate remote  
control code, you can control components made by other  
manufacturers (see page 137).  
bm  
bn  
DVD  
1
VCR  
/
DVR  
CBL/SAT  
+
TV CH  
-
2
AUX 1  
5
3
AUX 2  
6
Game/TV  
4
Tape  
7
CD  
9
Tuner  
8
CD/CDR/MD Mode  
TV VOL  
Phono  
D.TUN  
By default, you can control an Integra/Onkyo CD player  
in this mode. By entering the appropriate remote control  
code, you can control a CD player, MD recorder, or CD  
recorder made by another manufacturer (see page 137).  
+10  
Clear  
0
-- --- 10  
11  
12  
/
Input Selector  
Macro  
4
Zone  
3
2
1
2
3
Remote Mode  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
Zone  
CDR/MD  
Dock Mode  
Receiver  
bo  
bp  
TV  
Cable  
SAT  
Dock  
Receiver  
Tape/AMP  
Sleep  
This mode is for controlling an Apple iPod in an Onkyo  
RI Dock. You must enter the appropriate remote control  
code first (see page 137).  
Tape/AMP  
Dimmer  
5
6
+
TV and VCR Modes  
CH  
With these modes, you can control a TV and VCR. You  
must enter the appropriate remote control code first (see  
page 137).  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
Album  
7
bq  
br  
bs  
-
8
9
Prev  
CH  
Cable/SAT Mode  
Display  
Muting  
In Cable/SAT mode, you can control a cable or satellite  
TV receiver. You must enter the appropriate remote con-  
trol code first (see page 137).  
1
Playlist  
Rec  
Random  
Zone 2/Zone 3 Modes  
These modes are for controlling Zone 2 and Zone 3 (see  
page 132).  
Listening Mode  
Surround  
Stereo  
bk  
bl  
Repeat  
Audio  
Direct  
Subtitle  
THX  
Play Mode  
All ST  
Use the Remote Mode buttons to select a  
mode.  
1
Test Tone  
CH Sel  
Level-  
Level+  
Open/Close Video Off  
Audio Sel  
L Night  
DVD  
Re-EQ  
HDD  
bt  
ck  
Use the buttons supported by that mode  
VCR  
2
to control the component.  
Receiver/Tape mode: see right column  
DVD mode: see page 18  
RC-691M  
cl  
CD/CDR/MD mode: see page 19  
Dock mode: see page 20  
Note:  
Some of the remote controller functions described in this  
manual may not work as expected with other compo-  
nents.  
TV, VCR, Cable/SAT modes: see page 139  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Remote Controller—Continued  
For detailed information, see the pages in parentheses.  
u Audio Sel button (129)  
Selects the audio input: analog, digital, HDMI, or  
multichannel.  
a Standby button (45)  
Sets the AV controller to Standby.  
TAPE mode  
b On button (45)  
On twin cassette decks, only Deck B can be controlled.  
Turns on the AV controller.  
1 Previous and Next [7]/[6] buttons  
c Input Selector buttons (64)  
The Previous [7] button selects the previous  
track. During playback it selects the beginning of  
the current track. The Next [6] button selects the  
next track.  
Used to select the input source.  
d Macro buttons (141)  
Used with the Macro function.  
e Dimmer button (65)  
Depending on how they were recorded, the Previous  
and Next [7]/[6] buttons may not work prop-  
erly with some cassette tapes.  
Adjusts the display brightness.  
f Arrow [q]/[w]/[e]/[r] and Enter buttons  
Used to select and adjust settings.  
Play [1] button  
g CH +/– button (69)  
Starts playback.  
Selects radio presets.  
Rewind and Fast Forward [5]/[4]  
buttons  
h Setup button  
Used to change settings.  
The Rewind [5] button starts rewind. The Fast  
i Display button (66)  
Forward [4] button starts fast forward.  
Displays information about the current input source.  
Reverse Play [t] button  
j Listening Mode buttons (90)  
Starts reverse playback.  
Used to select the listening modes. The [Stereo],  
[Surround], and Listening Mode [e]/[r] buttons  
can be used at any time, regardless of the currently  
selected remote controller mode.  
Stop [2] button  
Stops playback.  
Rec [y] button  
Starts recording.  
k Test Tone, CH Sel, Level–, and Level+  
buttons (65, 108)  
Used to adjust the level of each speaker.  
l Light button  
Turns the remote controller’s illuminated buttons on  
or off.  
m D.TUN button (68)  
Selects the Direct tuning mode for radio.  
n Remote Mode buttons (16)  
Used to select the remote controller modes. When  
you press a button, the Remote Mode button for the  
currently selected mode lights up.  
o Sleep button (66)  
Used with the Sleep function.  
p VOL [q]/[w] button (64)  
Adjusts the volume of the AV controller regardless  
of the currently selected remote controller mode.  
q Return button  
Returns to the previous display when changing set-  
tings.  
r Muting button (65)  
Mutes or unmutes the AV controller.  
s Re-EQ button (116)  
Turns the Re-EQ function on or off.  
t L Night button (117)  
Turns the Late Night function on or off.  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remote Controller—Continued  
a Standby button  
DVD Mode  
Sets the DVD player to Standby.  
To set the remote controller to DVD mode, press the  
[DVD] Remote Mode button.  
b On button  
Turns on the DVD player.  
c Number buttons  
Used to enter title, chapter, and track numbers, and  
1
to enter times for locating specific points.  
On  
Standby  
TV  
Input  
d Top Menu button  
2
3
DVD  
1
VCR  
/
DVR  
CBL/SAT  
Selects a DVD’s top menu.  
+
TV CH  
-
2
AUX 1  
5
3
AUX 2  
6
e Arrow [q]/[w]/[e]/[r] and Enter buttons  
Game/TV  
4
Used to navigate menus and select items.  
Tape  
7
CD  
9
Tuner  
8
f Disc +/– button  
TV VOL  
Phono  
D.TUN  
Selects discs on a DVD changer.  
+10  
Clear  
0
-- --- 10  
11  
12  
/
Input Selector  
bn  
g Setup button  
Macro  
Used to access the DVD player’s settings.  
Zone  
3
2
1
2
3
Remote Mode  
h Display button  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
Zone  
CDR/MD  
Displays information about the current disc, title,  
chapter, or track, including elapsed time, remaining  
time, total time, and so on.  
DVD  
TV  
Cable  
SAT  
Dock  
Receiver  
Tape/AMP  
Sleep  
4
5
Dimmer  
bo  
i Playback buttons  
+
From left to right: Previous, Play, Next, Fast  
Reverse, Pause, Stop, Fast Forward, Slow Reverse,  
and Slow Forward.  
CH  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
Album  
6
-
bp  
7
8
Prev  
CH  
j Repeat button  
Used with the repeat playback function.  
Display  
Muting  
k Audio button  
9
Selects foreign language soundtracks and audio for-  
mats (e.g., Dolby Digital or DTS).  
Playlist  
Rec  
Random  
bq  
l Open/Close [0] button  
Listening Mode  
Surround  
Opens and closes the disc tray.  
Stereo  
Repeat  
Audio  
Direct  
Subtitle  
THX  
Play Mode  
All ST  
m Clear button  
bk  
bl  
br  
bs  
Cancels functions and clears entered numbers.  
Test Tone  
CH Sel  
Level-  
Level+  
n Menu button  
Open/Close Video Off  
Audio Sel  
Displays a DVD’s menu.  
L Night  
DVD  
Re-EQ  
HDD  
bm  
VCR  
bt  
o Return button  
RC-691M  
Exits the DVD player’s onscreen setup menu.  
p Random button  
Used with the random playback function.  
q Play Mode button  
Selects play modes on components with selectable  
play modes.  
r Subtitle button  
Selects subtitles.  
s Video Off button  
Turns off the internal video circuitry, eliminating  
any possibility of interference.  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Remote Controller—Continued  
a Standby button  
CD/CDR/MD Modes  
Sets the component to Standby.  
To control an Integra/Onkyo CD player, MD  
recorder, or CD recorder, or a CD or MD  
player/recorder made by another manufacturer,  
press the [CD] Remote Mode button to select the  
CD/CDR/MD remote controller mode.  
In order to control an Onkyo MD recorder or CD  
recorder, or a component made by another manufacturer,  
you must first enter the appropriate remote control code  
(see page 137).  
b On button  
Set the component to On or Standby.  
c Number buttons  
Used to enter track numbers and times for locating  
specific points.  
d Arrow [q]/[w]/[e]/[r] and Enter buttons  
Used with some components.  
e Disc +/– button  
Selects discs on a CD changer.  
f Display button  
1
Displays information about the current disc or track,  
including elapsed time, remaining time, total time,  
and so on.  
On  
Standby  
TV  
Input  
2
DVD  
1
VCR/  
DVR  
CBL/SAT  
+
TV CH  
-
2
AUX 1  
5
3
g Playback buttons  
3
AUX 2  
6
Game/TV  
From left to right: Previous, Play, Next, Fast  
Reverse, Pause, Stop, and Fast Forward.  
4
Tape  
7
CD  
9
Tuner  
8
TV VOL  
Phono  
D.TUN  
h Rec [y] button  
+10  
Clear  
0
Starts recording.  
-- --- 10  
11  
12  
/
Input Selector  
bl  
Macro  
i Repeat button  
Zone  
3
2
1
2
3
Used with the repeat playback function.  
Remote Mode  
CD  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
Zone  
j Open/Close [0] button  
CDR/MD  
CDR/MD  
Opens or closes the disc tray or ejects the MiniDisc.  
TV  
Cable  
SAT  
Dock  
Receiver  
Tape/AMP  
Sleep  
Dimmer  
k Clear button  
Cancels functions and clears entered numbers.  
4
5
+
l Return button  
CH  
Used with some components.  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
Album  
-
m Random button  
Prev  
CH  
Used with the random playback function.  
6
7
8
Display  
Muting  
bm  
n Play Mode button  
Selects play modes on components with selectable  
play modes.  
Playlist  
Rec  
Random  
bn  
bo  
Listening Mode  
Surround  
Stereo  
Repeat  
Audio  
Direct  
Subtitle  
THX  
Play Mode  
All ST  
9
bk  
Test Tone  
CH Sel  
Level  
-
Level+  
Open/Close Video Off  
Audio Sel  
L Night  
DVD  
Re-EQ  
HDD  
VCR  
RC-691M  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Remote Controller—Continued  
a Standby button  
Dock Mode  
Turns off the iPod.  
Dock mode is for controlling an Apple iPod in an Onkyo  
RI Dock.  
b On button*  
Turns on the iPod.  
To control an RI Dock, press the [Dock] Remote  
Mode button to select the Dock remote controller  
mode.  
In order to control an RI Dock, you must first enter the  
appropriate remote control code (see page 137).  
c Top Menu button  
Works as a Mode button when used with a DS-A2  
RI Dock.  
d Arrow [q]/[w] and Enter buttons*  
Used to navigate menus and select items.  
When Using an RI Dock:  
e Album +/– button*  
• Connect the RI Dock to the TAPE IN or AUX 1 IN  
L/R jacks.  
Selects the next or previous album.  
• Set the RI Dock’s RI MODE switch to HDD or  
HDD/DOCK.  
f Display button*  
Turns on the backlight for 30 seconds.  
• Set the AV controller’s Input Display to “DOCK” (see  
page 57).  
g Previous [7] button  
Restarts the current song. Press it twice to select the  
previous song.  
• See to the RI Dock’s instruction manual for more  
information.  
h Pause [3] button  
Pauses playback. (With 3rd generation iPods, it  
works as a Play/Pause button.)  
i Fast Reverse [5] button  
1
On  
Standby  
TV  
Press and hold to fast reverse.  
Input  
2
DVD  
1
VCR/DVR  
CBL  
/
SAT  
j Playlist Up/Down [i]/[o] buttons*  
Used to select the previous or next playlist on the  
iPod.  
+
TV CH  
-
2
AUX 1  
5
3
AUX 2  
6
Game/TV  
4
Tape  
7
CD  
9
Tuner  
8
k Repeat button*  
TV VOL  
Used with the repeat function.  
Phono  
D.TUN  
+10  
-- --- 10  
/
Clear  
0
11  
12  
l Menu button*  
Input Selector  
Macro  
Used to access menus.  
Zone  
3
2
1
2
3
Remote Mode  
m Play [1] button  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
Zone  
Starts playback. If the component is off, it will turn  
on automatically. (With 3rd generation iPods, this  
button works as a Play/Pause button.)  
CDR/MD  
Dock  
TV  
Cable  
SAT  
Dock  
Receiver  
Tape/AMP  
Sleep  
Dimmer  
3
4
n Next [6] button  
bm  
Selects the next song.  
+
CH  
o Stop [2] button  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
Album  
5
Stops playback and displays a menu.  
-
Prev  
CH  
p Fast Forward [4] button  
6
bn  
Press and hold to fast forward.  
Display  
Muting  
7
8
9
bo  
bp  
q Random button*  
Used with the shuffle function.  
bq  
br  
Playlist  
Rec  
Random  
r Play Mode button  
Used to select play modes on components with  
selectable play modes. Works as a Resume button  
when used with a DS-A2 RI Dock.  
bk  
Listening Mode  
Surround  
Stereo  
Repeat  
Audio  
Direct  
Subtitle  
THX  
Play Mode  
All ST  
bl  
bs  
Test Tone  
CH Sel  
Level-  
Level+  
*
Buttons marked with an asterisk (*) are not supported by 3rd  
Open/Close Video Off  
Audio Sel  
generation iPods.  
L Night  
DVD  
Re-EQ  
HDD  
VCR  
RC-691M  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
About Home Theater  
Enjoying Home Theater  
Thanks to the AV controller’s superb capabilities, you can enjoy surround sound with a real sense of movement in your  
own home—just like being in a movie theater or concert hall. With DVDs you can enjoy DTS and Dolby Digital. With  
analog or digital TV, you can enjoy Dolby Pro Logic IIx, DTS Neo:6, or Onkyo’s original DSP listening modes. You  
can also enjoy THX Surround EX (THX-certified THX speaker system recommended).  
Front left and right speakers  
These output the main sound. Their role in a home theater is to provide a solid  
anchor for the sound image. They should be positioned facing the listener at  
about ear level, and equally spaced from the TV. Angle them inward slightly  
so as to create a triangle, with the listener at the apex.  
Surround left and right speakers  
These speakers are used for precise  
sound positioning and to add realistic  
ambience.  
Position them at the sides of the lis-  
tener, or slightly behind, about  
2–3 feet (60–100 cm)above ear level.  
Ideally they should be equally spaced  
from the listener.  
Center speaker  
This speaker enhances the front left  
and right speakers, making sound  
movements distinct and providing a  
full sound image. For movies it’s used  
mainly for dialog.  
Position it close to your TV (preferably  
on top) facing forward at about ear  
level, or at the same height as the  
front left and right speakers.  
Subwoofer  
The subwoofer handles the bass sounds of the  
LFE (Low-Frequency Effects) channel. The  
volume and quality of the bass output from  
your subwoofer will depend on its position, the  
shape of your listening room, and your listen-  
ing position. In general, a good bass sound  
can be obtained by installing the subwoofer in  
a front corner, or at one-third the way along the  
front wall, as shown.  
Surround back left and right speakers  
These speakers are necessary to enjoy Dolby Digital  
EX, DTS-ES Matrix, DTS-ES Discrete, THX Surround  
EX, etc. They enhance the realism of surround sound  
and improve sound localization behind the listener. Posi-  
tion them behind the listener about 2–3 feet  
(60–100 cm) above ear level.  
Tip: To find the best position for your sub-  
woofer, while playing a movie or some music  
with good bass, experiment by placing your  
subwoofer at various positions within the room  
and choose the one that provides the most  
satisfying results.  
Corner  
position  
1/3 of wall  
position  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Connecting the AV Controller  
Connecting Your Speakers  
The AV controller is designed to be used with a separate  
multichannel power amplifier. You connect the AV con-  
troller’s PRE OUT jacks to the amplifier’s inputs, and  
connect your speakers to the amplifier’s speakers termi-  
nals. Speaker settings such as crossover frequency and  
distance are set on the AV controller.  
Using Dipole Speakers  
You can use dipole speakers for the surround left and  
right and surround back left and right speakers. Dipole  
speakers output the same sound in two directions.  
Dipole speakers typically have an arrow printed on them  
to indicate how they should be positioned. The surround  
left and right dipole speakers should be positioned so that  
their arrows point toward your TV or screen, while the sur-  
round back left and right dipolar speakers should be posi-  
tioned so that their arrows point toward each other, as  
shown.  
Speaker Configuration  
For 7.1-channel surround-sound playback, you need  
seven speakers and a powered subwoofer.  
The following table shows which channels you should  
use based on the number of speakers you have.  
Normal speakers  
Dipole speakers  
1
TV/screen  
1
TV/screen  
Number of speakers:  
Front left  
2
3
4
5
6
7
4
2
3
4
2
3
Front right  
Center  
Surround left  
5
6
5
6
Surround right  
Surround back*  
Surround back left  
Surround back right  
7
8
7
8
1. Subwoofer  
2. Front left speaker  
3. Center speaker  
6. Surround right speaker  
7. Surround back left  
speaker  
*
If you’re using only one surround back speaker, use the SURR  
BACK L output.  
4. Front right speaker  
5. Surround left speaker  
8. Surround back right  
speaker  
No matter how many speakers you use, a powered sub-  
woofer is recommended for a powerful and solid bass.  
To get the best from your surround-sound system, you  
must set the speaker settings. You can do this automati-  
cally (see page 58) or manually (see page 104).  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Connecting the AV Controller—Continued  
Connecting a Powered Subwoofer  
Using a suitable cable, connect the AV controller’s SUB-  
WOOFER PRE OUT to the input on your powered sub-  
woofer. If your subwoofer is unpowered and you’re  
using an external amplifier, connect the SUBWOOFER  
PRE OUT to the amp’s input.  
You can also connect a powered subwoofer to the AV  
controller’s balanced SUBWOOFER PRE OUT XLR  
jack by using a balanced XLR cable.  
Powered  
subwoofer  
Powered  
subwoofer  
INPUT  
LINE INPUT  
INPUT  
SUBWOOFER  
PRE OUT  
LINE INPUT  
Balanced  
XLR cable  
SUBWOOFER  
PRE OUT  
Connecting a Power Amplifier with RCA Inputs  
You can connect the AV controller to a multichannel power amplifier with RCA input jacks by using a multichannel  
RCA audio cable or several stereo RCA audio cables.  
See your multichannel power amplifier’s instruction manual for more information on connecting speakers.  
AV controller  
Multichannel  
power amplifier  
SURROUND  
RIGHT  
FRONT  
RIGHT  
FRONT  
LEFT  
SURROUND  
LEFT  
SURROUND BACK  
LEFT  
SURROUND BACK  
RIGHT  
CENTER  
INPUT  
SELECT  
INPUT  
SELECT  
INPUT  
SELECT  
INPUT  
SELECT  
INPUT  
SELECT  
INPUT  
SELECT  
INPUT  
SELECT  
OUTPUT  
OUTPUT  
OUTPUT  
OUTPUT  
OUTPUT  
OUTPUT  
OUTPUT  
Surround  
back right  
speaker  
Surround  
right  
speaker  
Frontright  
speaker  
Center  
speaker  
Front left  
speaker  
Surround  
left  
speaker  
Surround  
back left  
speaker  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Connecting the AV Controller—Continued  
Connecting a Power Amplifier with XLR Inputs  
You can connect the AV controller to a multichannel power amplifier with balanced XLR input jacks by using several  
XLR audio cables.  
The AV controller’s balanced PRE OUT XLR jacks are wired as shown.  
See your multichannel power amplifier’s instruction manual for more information on connecting speakers.  
AV controller  
Multichannel  
power amplifier  
SURROUND  
RIGHT  
FRONT  
RIGHT  
FRONT  
LEFT  
SURROUND  
LEFT  
SURROUND BACK  
LEFT  
SURROUND BACK  
RIGHT  
CENTER  
INPUT  
SELECT  
INPUT  
SELECT  
INPUT  
SELECT  
INPUT  
SELECT  
INPUT  
SELECT  
INPUT  
SELECT  
INPUT  
SELECT  
OUTPUT  
OUTPUT  
OUTPUT  
OUTPUT  
OUTPUT  
OUTPUT  
OUTPUT  
Surround  
back right  
speaker  
Surround  
right  
speaker  
Frontright  
speaker  
Center  
speaker  
Front left  
speaker  
Surround  
left  
speaker  
Surround  
back left  
speaker  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Connecting the AV Controller—Continued  
Bi-amping the Front Speakers  
The FRONT L/R and SURR BACK L/R outputs can be used with front speakers and surround back speakers, respec-  
tively, or bi-amped to provide separate tweeter and woofer feeds for a pair of front speakers that support bi-amping,  
providing improved bass and treble performance.  
• When bi-amping is used, the AV controller is able to feed up to 5.1 speakers in the main room.  
• For bi-amping, the FRONT L/R outputs feed the front speakers’ woofer terminals. And the SURR BACK L/R  
outputs feed the front speakers’ tweeter terminals.  
• Once you’ve completed the bi-amping connections shown below and turned on the AV controller, you must set  
the “Speaker Type” setting to “Bi-Amp” to enable bi-amping (see page 55).  
Important:  
• When making the bi-amping connections, be sure to remove the jumper bars that link the speakers’  
tweeter (high) and woofer (low) terminals.  
• Bi-amping can only be used with speakers that support bi-amping. Refer to your speaker manual.  
See your multichannel power amplifier’s instruction manual for more information on connecting speakers.  
AV controller  
Multichannel  
power amplifier  
SURROUND  
RIGHT  
FRONT  
RIGHT  
FRONT  
LEFT  
SURROUND  
LEFT  
SURROUND BACK  
LEFT  
SURROUND BACK  
RIGHT  
CENTER  
INPUT  
SELECT  
INPUT  
SELECT  
INPUT  
SELECT  
INPUT  
SELECT  
INPUT  
SELECT  
INPUT  
SELECT  
INPUT  
SELECT  
OUTPUT  
OUTPUT  
OUTPUT  
OUTPUT  
OUTPUT  
OUTPUT  
OUTPUT  
Surround right  
speaker  
Center speaker  
Surround left  
speaker  
Tweeter (high)  
Woofer (low)  
Front right speaker  
Front left speaker  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Connecting the AV Controller—Continued  
Connecting Antenna  
Use thumbtacks or something similar to  
fix the FM antenna into position.  
2
This section explains how to connect the supplied indoor  
FM antenna and AM loop antenna, and how to connect  
commercially available outdoor FM and AM antennas.  
The AV controller won’t pick up any radio signals  
without any antenna connected, so you must connect the  
antenna to use the tuner.  
Thumbtacks, etc.  
North American Model  
AM ANTENNA push terminals  
Caution: Be careful that you don’t injure yourself  
when using thumbtacks.  
If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied  
indoor FM antenna, try a commercially available out-  
door FM antenna instead (see page 27).  
FM ANTENNA jack  
Other Models  
Connecting the AM Loop Antenna  
AM ANTENNA push terminals  
The supplied indoor AM loop antenna is for indoor use  
only.  
Assemble the AM loop antenna, inserting  
the tabs into the base, as shown.  
1
FM ANTENNA jack  
Connecting the Indoor FM Antenna  
Connect both wires of the AM loop  
antenna to the AM push terminals, as  
shown.  
2
The supplied indoor FM antenna is for indoor use only.  
Attach the FM antenna, as shown.  
(The antenna’s wires are not polarity sensitive, so  
they can be connected either way around).  
1
North American Model  
Make sure that the wires are attached securely and  
that the push terminals are gripping the bare  
wires, not the insulation.  
Insert the plug fully  
into the jack.  
North American Model  
Other Models  
FM75  
Push  
Insert wire  
Release  
Insert the plug fully  
into the jack.  
Once your AV controller is ready for use, you’ll  
need to tune into an FM radio station and adjust  
the position of the FM antenna to achieve the best  
possible reception.  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Connecting the AV Controller—Continued  
Using a TV/FM Antenna Splitter  
Other Models  
It’s best not to use the same antenna for both FM and TV  
reception, as this can cause interference problems. If cir-  
cumstances demand it, use a TV/FM antenna splitter, as  
shown.  
Push  
Insert wire  
Release  
TV/FM antenna splitter  
To AV controller  
To TV (or VCR)  
Once your AV controller is ready for use, you’ll  
need to tune into an AM radio station and adjust  
the position of the AM antenna to achieve the best  
possible reception.  
Connecting an Outdoor AM Antenna  
If good reception cannot be achieved using the supplied  
AM loop antenna, an outdoor AM antenna can be used  
in addition to the loop antenna, as shown.  
Keep the antenna as far away as possible from  
your AV controller, TV, speaker cables, and  
power cords.  
North American Model  
Outdoor antenna  
If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied  
indoor AM loop antenna, try using it with a commer-  
cially available outdoor AM antenna (see page 27).  
Insulated antenna cable  
AM loop antenna  
Connecting an Outdoor FM Antenna  
If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied  
indoor FM antenna, try a commercially available out-  
door FM antenna instead.  
Other Models  
Outdoor antenna  
Insulated antenna cable  
AM loop antenna  
Notes:  
Outdoor AM antennas work best when installed horizon-  
tally outside, but good results can sometimes be obtained  
indoors by mounting horizontally above a window. Note  
that the AM loop antenna should be left connected.  
• Outdoor FM antennas work best outside, but usable  
results can sometimes be obtained when installed in an  
attic or loft.  
• For best results, install the outdoor FM antenna well  
away from tall buildings, preferably with a clear line  
of sight to your local FM transmitter.  
Outdoor antenna must be grounded in accordance with  
local regulations to prevent electrical shock hazards.  
• Outdoor antenna should be located away from possi-  
ble noise sources, such as neon signs, busy roads, etc.  
• For safety reasons, outdoor antenna should be situated  
well away from power lines and other high-voltage  
equipment.  
• Outdoor antenna must be grounded in accordance  
with local regulations to prevent electrical shock haz-  
ards.  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Connecting the AV Controller—Continued  
AV Connection Color Coding  
About AV Connections  
RCA-type AV connections are usually color coded: red,  
white, and yellow. Use red plugs to connect right-  
channel audio inputs and outputs (typically labeled “R”).  
Use white plugs to connect left-channel audio inputs and  
outputs (typically labeled “L”). And use yellow plugs to  
connect composite video inputs and outputs.  
• Before making any AV connections, read the manuals  
supplied with your other AV components.  
• Don’t connect the power cord until you’ve completed  
and double-checked all AV connections.  
Optical Digital Jacks  
Analog audio  
Left (white)  
Right (red)  
Left (white)  
Right (red)  
The AV controller’s optical digital jacks have shutter-  
type covers that open when an optical plug is inserted  
and close when it’s removed. Push plugs in all the way.  
Composite video  
(Yellow)  
(Yellow)  
Right!  
• Push plugs in all the way to make  
good connections (loose connec-  
tions can cause noise or malfunc-  
tions).  
Caution: To prevent shutter damage, hold the optical  
plug straight when inserting and removing.  
• To prevent interference, keep  
audio and video cables away from  
power cords and speaker cables.  
Wrong!  
AV Cables and Jacks  
Video  
Cable  
Jack  
Description  
HDMI connections can carry uncompressed stan-  
dard- or high-definition digital video and audio and  
offer the best picture and sound quality.  
HDMI  
HDMI  
Component video separates the luminance (Y) and  
color difference signals (PR, PB), providing the best  
picture quality. (Some TV manufacturers label their  
component video jacks slightly differently.)  
Y
C
C
Y
Y
Component  
video cable  
C
B/PB  
B
/
P
B
R
C
C
B/PB  
C
R/PR  
R/  
P
R/PR  
S-Video separates the luminance and color signals  
and provides better picture quality than composite  
video.  
S
S-Video cable  
Composite video is commonly used on TVs, VCRs,  
and other video equipment.  
Composite  
video cable  
V
Audio  
This offers the best sound quality and allows you to  
enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS. The audio quality is  
the same as for coaxial.  
OPTICAL  
Optical digital  
audio cable  
This offers the best sound quality and allows you to  
enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS. The audio quality is  
the same as for optical.  
COAXIAL  
Coaxial digital  
audio cable  
This cable carries analog audio. Balanced XLR  
cables are used for better noise immunity and longer  
cable runs.  
Balanced XLR  
cable  
This cable carries analog audio. It’s the most  
common connection format for analog audio and  
can be found on virtually all AV components.  
L
Analog audio  
cable (RCA)  
R
This cable carries multichannel analog audio and is  
typically used to connect DVD players with a 7.1-  
channel analog audio output. Several standard  
analog audio cables can be used instead of a multi-  
channel cable.  
FRONT CENTER  
SURR SURR BACK  
Multichannel  
analog audio  
cable (RCA)  
SUBWOOFER  
MULTI CH  
Note: The AV controller does not support SCART connections.  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Connecting the AV Controller—Continued  
Connecting Both Audio & Video  
By connecting both the audio and video outputs of your DVD player and other AV components to the AV controller,  
you can switch the audio and video signals simultaneously simply by changing the input source on the AV controller.  
: Signal Flow  
Video  
Video  
Audio  
Audio  
TV, projector,  
etc.  
DVD player, etc.  
On  
Power  
On  
S
tandby  
O
f
f
Seven Channel Amplifier RDA-7.1  
Power amplifier and speakers  
(see page 23 for hookup details)  
Which Connections Should I Use?  
The AV controller supports several connection formats for compatibility with a wide range of AV equipment. The format  
you choose will depend on the formats supported by your other components. Use the following sections as a guide.  
For video components, you must make an audio connection and a video connection.  
Video Connection Formats  
Video equipment can be connected to the AV controller by using any one of the following video connection formats:  
composite video, S-Video, component video, or HDMI, the latter offering the best picture quality.  
The AV controller can upconvert and downconvert between video formats, depending on the “Monitor Out” setting,  
which generally determines whether video signals are upconverted for the component video output or the HDMI outputs.  
For optimal video performance, THX recommends that video signals pass through the system without upconver-  
sion (e.g., component video input through to component video output). It’s also recommended that you set the  
“Immediate Display” preference to “Off” (see page 124), the “Picture Adjust” setting to the default (see  
page 119), and the “Resolution” setting to “Through” (see pages 49, 50).  
“Monitor Out” Setting Set to “HDMI Main” or “HDMI Sub”  
With the “Monitor Out” setting set to “HDMI  
Main” or “HDMI Sub” (see page 49), video  
input signals flow through the AV controller as  
Video Signal Flow Chart  
DVD player, etc.  
shown, with composite video, S-Video, and  
component video sources all being upcon-  
verted for the respective HDMI output. Use the  
Composite  
S-Video  
Component  
HDMI  
“HDMI Main” or “HDMI Sub” setting if  
you connect the AV controller’s HDMI OUT  
MAIN or HDMI OUT SUB, respectively, to  
your TV.  
IN  
AV controller  
The composite video, S-Video, and component  
video outputs pass through their respective  
input signals as they are.  
MONITOR OUT  
Composite  
S-Video  
Component  
HDMI  
TV, projector, etc.  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Connecting the AV Controller—Continued  
“Monitor Out” Setting Set to  
“Analog”  
Video Signal Flow Chart  
DVD player, etc.  
With the “Monitor Out” setting set to “Analog”  
(see page 49), video input signals flow through  
the AV controller as shown, with composite  
video and S-Video sources being upconverted  
for the component video output. Use this set-  
ting if you connect the AV controller’s  
COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT 1  
or 2 to your TV.  
Composite  
S-Video  
Component  
HDMI  
HDMI  
IN  
AV controller  
Composite video is upconverted to S-Video  
and S-Video is downconverted to composite  
video. Note that these conversions only apply  
to the MONITOR OUT V and S outputs, not  
the VCR/DVR OUT V and S outputs.  
MONITOR OUT  
S-Video  
Composite  
Component  
The composite video, S-Video, and component  
video outputs pass through their respective  
input signals as they are.  
TV, projector, etc.  
This signal flow also applies when the Monitor  
Out “Resolution” setting is set to “Through” (see pages 49, 50).  
Video Signal Flow and the Resolution Setting  
Video Signal Flow Chart  
DVD player, etc.  
When the “Monitor Out” setting is set to “Ana-  
log” (see page 49), if the Monitor Out “Reso-  
lution” setting is set to anything other than  
“Through” (see pages 49, 50), the video signal  
flow will be as shown here, with composite  
video and S-Video sources being upconverted  
for the component video output.  
Composite  
S-Video  
Component  
HDMI  
HDMI  
IN  
The composite video, S-Video, and component  
video outputs pass through their respective  
analog input signals as they are. HDMI input  
signals are not output.  
AV controller  
MONITOR OUT  
S-Video  
Composite  
Component  
TV, projector, etc.  
Audio Connection Formats  
Audio equipment can be connected to the AV  
controller by using any of the following audio  
connection formats: analog, optical, coaxial,  
analog multichannel, or HDMI.  
Audio Signal Flow Chart  
DVD player, etc.  
When choosing a connection format, bear in  
mind that the AV controller does not convert  
digital input signals for analog line outputs and  
vice versa. For example, audio signals con-  
nected to an optical or coaxial digital input are  
not output by the analog TAPE OUT.  
Analog Multichannel Optical Coaxial  
HDMI  
HDMI  
AV controller  
2
*
Analog  
Optical  
1
*
*1 Depends on the “Audio TV Out” setting (see page 126).  
*2 Only the front L/R channels are output.  
MD recorder, etc.  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Connecting a TV or Projector  
See “Connecting Components with HDMI” on page 37 for HDMI connection information.  
Step 1: Video Connection  
Choose a video connection that matches your TV (  
,
, or ), and then make the connection.  
A
B
C
Step 2: Audio Connection  
Choose an audio connection that matches your TV (  
,
, or ), and then make the connection.  
a
b
c
• With connection , you can listen to and record audio from your TV or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.  
a
• To enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS, use connection or . (To record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well, use  
b
c
and , or and .)  
a
b
a
c
Connection  
AV controller  
Signal flow  
TV  
COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT 1  
MONITOR OUT S  
Component video input  
S-Video input  
A
B
C
a
MONITOR OUT V  
Composite video input  
Analog audio L/R output  
Digital coaxial output  
Digital optical output  
GAME/TV IN L/R  
DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 2 (VCR/DVR)  
DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 1 (GAME/TV)  
b
c
C
b
c
B
a
A
L
R
COAXIAL  
OUT  
OPTICAL  
OUT  
Y
PB  
PR  
AUDIO  
OUT  
S VIDEO  
IN  
VIDEO  
IN  
COMPONENT VIDEO IN  
Connect one or the other  
TV, projector,  
etc.  
Connection  
must be assigned (see page 53)  
b
If your TV has no audio outputs, connect an audio output from your VCR or cable or satellite  
receiver to the AV controller and use its tuner to listen to TV programs through the AV controller  
(see pages 34 and 36).  
Hint!  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Connecting the AV Controller—Continued  
Connecting a DVD player  
Step 1: Video Connection  
Choose a video connection that matches your DVD player (  
,
, or ), and then make the connection.  
A
B
C
If you use connection , you must connect the AV controller to your TV with the same type of connection.  
A
Step 2: Audio Connection  
Choose an audio connection that matches your DVD player (  
,
, or ), and then make the connection.  
a
b
c
• With connection , you can listen to and record audio from a DVD or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.  
a
• To enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS, use connection or . (To record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well, use  
b
c
and , or and .)  
a
b
a
c
• If your DVD player has main left and right outputs and multichannel left and right outputs, be sure to use the  
main left and right outputs for connection  
.
a
Connection  
AV controller  
Signal flow  
DVD player  
COMPONENT VIDEO IN 1 (DVD)  
DVD IN S  
Component video output  
S-Video output  
A
B
C
a
DVD IN V  
Composite video output  
Analog audio L/R output  
Digital coaxial output  
Digital optical output  
DVD IN L/R  
DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 1 (DVD)  
DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 1 (GAME/TV)  
b
c
C
b
c
B
a
A
COAXIAL  
OUT  
OPTICAL  
OUT  
Y
PB  
PR  
AUDIO  
OUT  
S VIDEO  
OUT  
VIDEO  
OUT  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT  
Connect one or the other  
Connection must be assigned (see page 53)  
c
DVD player  
To connect a DVD player or DVD-Audio/SACD-capable player with a  
multichannel analog audio output, see page 33.  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Connecting the AV Controller—Continued  
Hooking Up the Multichannel Input  
If your DVD player supports multichannel audio formats such as DVD-Audio and SACD, and it has a multichannel  
analog audio output, you can connect it to the AV controller’s multichannel input.  
Use a multichannel analog audio cable, or several normal audio cables, to connect the AV controller’s MULTI CH:  
FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURR L/R, SURR BACK L/R, and SUBWOOFER jacks to the 7.1-channel analog audio  
output on your DVD player. If your DVD player has a 5.1-channel analog audio output, don’t connect anything to the  
AV controller’s SURR BACK L/R jacks.  
Before using the multichannel input, you must assign it to an input selector. See “Analog Audio Input Setup” on page 54.  
To select the multichannel input, see “Selecting Audio Inputs” on page 129. To adjust the subwoofer sensitivity for the  
multichannel input, see “Subwoofer Input Sensitivity” on page 126.  
7.1 ch  
5.1 ch  
FRONT  
CENTER  
SURR  
SURR BACK  
L
L
R
R
SUBWOOFER  
MULTI CH  
L
R
L
R
L
R
FRONT  
CENTER  
SUB  
WOOFER  
SURROUND  
SURR  
BACK  
DVD player  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Connecting the AV Controller—Continued  
Connecting a VCR or DVD Recorder for Playback  
With this hookup, you can use the tuner in your VCR or DVR to listen to your favorite TV programs  
via the AV controller, which is useful if your TV has no audio outputs.  
Hint!  
Step 1: Video Connection  
Choose a video connection that matches your VCR or DVD recorder (  
,
, or ), and then make the connection.  
A
B
C
If you use connection , you must connect the AV controller to your TV with the same type of connection.  
A
Step 2: Audio Connection  
Choose an audio connection that matches your VCR or DVD recorder (  
,
, or ), and then make the connection.  
a
b
c
• With connection , you can listen to the VCR or DVD recorder in Zone 2 or Zone 3.  
a
• To enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS, use connection or . (To listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well, use and  
b
c
a
, or and .)  
b
a
c
Connection  
AV controller  
COMPONENT VIDEO IN 2  
VCR/DVR IN S  
Signal flow  
VCR or DVD recorder  
Component video output  
S-Video output  
A
B
C
a
VCR/DVR IN V  
Composite video output  
Analog audio L/R output  
Digital coaxial output  
Digital optical output  
VCR/DVR IN L/R  
DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 2 (VCR/DVR)  
DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 1 (GAME/TV)  
b
c
C
b
B
a
A
Connection  
must be  
A
assigned  
(see  
page 52)  
L
R
COAXIAL  
OUT  
OPTICAL  
OUT  
Y
PB  
PR  
AUDIO  
OUT  
S VIDEO  
OUT  
VIDEO  
OUT  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT  
Connect one or the other  
Connection  
must be assigned (see page 53)  
c
VCR,  
DVD recorder  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Connecting the AV Controller—Continued  
Connecting a VCR or DVD Recorder for Recording  
Step 1: Video Connection  
Choose a video connection that matches your VCR or DVD recorder ( or ), and then make the connection. The  
A
B
video source to be recorded must be connected to the AV controller via the same type of connection.  
Step 2: Audio Connection  
Choose an audio connection that matches your VCR or DVD recorder ( or ), and then make the connection.  
a
b
Connection  
AV controller  
VCR/DVR OUT S  
Signal flow  
VCR or DVD recorder  
S-Video input  
A
B
a
VCR/DVR OUT V  
Composite video input  
Audio L/R input  
VCR/DVR OUT L/R  
DIGITAL OPTICAL OUT  
Digital optical input  
b
B
A
a
b
L
R
OPTICAL  
IN  
AUDIO  
IN  
S VIDEO  
IN  
VIDEO  
IN  
VCR,  
DVD recorder  
Notes:  
• The AV controller must be turned on for recording. Recording is not possible while it’s on Standby mode.  
• If you want to record directly from your TV or another video source without going through the AV controller, connect  
the audio and video outputs from your TV or other video component directly to the recording VCR/DVD recorder’s  
audio and video inputs. See the manuals supplied with your TV or VCR/DVD recorder for details.  
• Video signals connected to composite video inputs can only be recorded via the VCR/DVR OUT V jack. So if your  
source TV or VCR is connected to a composite video input, the recording VCR/DVR must be connected to the  
VCR/DVR OUT V jack. Likewise, video signals connected to S-Video inputs can only be recorded via the VCR/DVR  
OUT S jack. So if your source TV or VCR is connected to an S-Video input, the recording VCR/DVD recorder must  
be connected to the VCR/DVR OUT S jack.  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Connecting the AV Controller—Continued  
Connecting a Satellite, Cable, Terrestrial Set-top box, or Other Video Source  
With this hookup, you can use your satellite or cable receiver to listen to your favorite TV programs  
via the AV controller, which is useful if your TV has no audio outputs.  
Hint!  
Step 1: Video Connection  
Choose a video connection that matches the video source (  
,
, or ), and then make the connection.  
A
B
C
If you use connection , you must connect the AV controller to your TV with the same type of connection.  
A
Step 2: Audio Connection  
Choose an audio connection that matches the video source (  
,
, or ), and then make the connection.  
a
b
c
• With connection , you can listen to and record audio from the video source or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.  
a
• To enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS, use connection or . (To record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well, use  
b
c
and , or and .)  
a
b
a
c
Connection  
AV controller  
Signal flow  
Video source  
Component video output  
S-Video output  
COMPONENT VIDEO IN 3  
CBL/SAT IN S  
A
B
C
a
CBL/SAT IN V  
Composite video output  
Analog audio L/R output  
Digital coaxial output  
Digital optical output  
CBL/SAT IN L/R  
DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 3 (CBL/SAT)  
DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 2 (CD)  
b
c
C
B
b
a
c
A
L
R
COAXIAL  
OUT  
OPTICAL  
OUT  
Y
PB  
PR  
AUDIO  
OUT  
S VIDEO  
OUT  
VIDEO  
OUT  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT  
Connect one or the other  
Connection must be assigned (see page 53)  
c
Satellite, cable, set-top box, etc.  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Connecting the AV Controller—Continued  
Connecting Components with HDMI  
About HDMI  
Designed to meet the increased demands of digital TV, HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) is a new digital  
interface standard for connecting TVs, projectors, DVD players, set-top boxes, and other video components. Until now,  
several separate video and audio cables have been required to connect AV components. With HDMI, a single cable can  
carry control signals, digital video, and up to eight channels of digital audio (2-channel PCM, multichannel digital  
audio, or multichannel PCM).  
*1  
The HDMI video stream (i.e., video signal) is compatible with DVI (Digital Visual Interface) , so TVs and displays  
with a DVI input can be connected by using an HDMI-to-DVI adapter cable. (This may not work with some TVs and  
displays, resulting in no picture.)  
*2  
The AV controller uses HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) , so only HDCP-compatible components  
will display a picture.  
The AV controller’s HDMI interface is based on the following standard:  
Repeater System, Deep Color, Lip Sync, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, Dolby TrueHD,  
Dolby Digital Plus, SA-CD, and Multichannel PCM  
Supported Audio Formats  
• 2-channel linear PCM (32–192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit)  
• Multichannel linear PCM (7.1 ch, 32–192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit)  
• Bitstream (DSD, Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, DTS, DTS-HD High Resolution, DTS-HD Mas-  
ter Audio)  
Your DVD player must be able to output these formats from its HDMI OUT.  
About Copyright Protection  
*2  
The AV controller supports HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) , a copy-protection system for digital  
video signals. Other devices connected to the AV controller via HDMI must also support HDCP.  
Use a commercially available HDMI cable (supplied with some components) to connect the AV controller’s HDMI  
OUT MAIN or HDMI OUT SUB to the HDMI input on your TV or projector.  
*3  
*1 DVI (Digital Visual Interface): The digital display interface standard set by the DDWG in 1999.  
*2 HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection): The video encryption technology developed by Intel for HDMI/DVI. It’s designed to  
protect video content and requires a HDCP-compatible device to display the encrypted video.  
*3 DDWG (Digital Display Working Group): Lead by Intel, Compaq, Fujitsu, Hewlett Packard, IBM, NEC, and Silicon Image, this open  
industry group’s objective is to address the industry's requirements for a digital connectivity specification for high-performance PCs and  
digital displays.  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Connecting the AV Controller—Continued  
Making HDMI Connections  
Step 1:  
Use HDMI cables to connect the AV controller’s HDMI jacks to your HDMI-compatible Blu-ray player/DVD player,  
TV, projector, and so on.  
Step 2:  
Assign each HDMI IN to an input selector. See “Video Input Setup” on page 50.  
Video Signals  
Digital video signals received by the HDMI IN jacks are normally output by the HDMI OUT MAIN and OUT SUB for  
display on your TV. Composite video, S-Video, and component video sources can be upconverted for the HDMI outputs.  
See “Video Connection Formats” on page 29 for more information.  
Audio Signals  
Digital audio signals received by the HDMI IN jacks are output by the speakers and headphones connected to the AV  
controller. Normally, they are not output by the HDMI outputs, unless the “Audio TV Out” setting is set to “On” (see  
page 126).  
To listen to audio received by the HDMI IN jacks through your TV’s speakers, set the “Audio TV Out”  
Hint!  
setting to “On” (see page 126), and set your DVD player’s “Audio TV Output” setting to PCM.  
HDMI  
OUT  
HDMI  
IN  
TV  
Blu-ray player/  
DVD player  
HDMI  
HDMI  
Notes:  
• The HDMI video stream is compatible with DVI (Digital Visual Interface), so TVs and displays with a DVI input can  
be connected by using an HDMI-to-DVI adapter cable. (Note that DVI connections only carry video, so you’ll need  
to make a separate connection for audio.) However, reliable operation with such an adapter is not guaranteed. In  
addition, video signals from a PC are not supported.  
• When listening to an HDMI component through the AV controller, set the HDMI component so that its video can be  
seen on the TV screen (on the TV, select the input of the HDMI component connected to the AV controller). If the  
TV power is off or the TV is set to another input source, this may result in no sound from the AV controller or the  
sound may be cut off.  
• When the “Audio TV Out” setting is set to “On” (see page 126), or “TV Control” is set to “Enable” (see page 127)  
and you’re listening through your TV’s speakers, if you turn up the AV controller volume control, the sound will be  
output by the AV controller’s speakers. To stop the AV controller’s speakers producing sound, change the settings,  
change your TV’s settings, or turn down the AV controller’s volume.  
• The HDMI audio signal (sampling rate, bit length, etc.) may be restricted by the connected source component. If the  
picture is poor or there’s no sound from a component connected via HDMI, check its setup. Refer to the connected  
component’s instruction manual for details.  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Connecting the AV Controller—Continued  
Connecting a Game Console  
Step 1: Video Connection  
Choose a video connection that matches your game console (  
,
, or ), and then make the connection.  
A
B
C
If you use connection , you must connect the AV controller to your TV with the same type of connection.  
A
Step 2: Audio Connection  
Choose an audio connection that matches your DVD player (  
,
, or ), and then make the connection.  
a
b
c
• With connection , you can listen to and record audio from your game console or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.  
a
• To enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS, use connection . (To record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well, use  
b
a
and .)  
b
Connection  
AV controller  
COMPONENT VIDEO IN 3  
GAME/TV IN S  
Signal flow  
Game console  
Component video output  
S-Video output  
A
B
C
a
GAME/TV IN V  
Composite video output  
Analog audio L/R output  
Digital coaxial output  
GAME/TV IN L/R  
DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 1 (GAME/TV)  
b
C
B
b
a
A
Connection  
must be  
A
assigned (see  
page 52)  
L
R
OPTICAL  
OUT  
Y
PB  
PR  
AUDIO  
OUT  
S VIDEO  
OUT  
VIDEO  
OUT  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT  
Game Console  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Connecting the AV Controller—Continued  
Connecting a Camcorder or Other Device  
Step 1: Video Connection  
Choose a video connection that matches your camcorder ( or ), and then make the connection.  
A
B
Step 2: Audio Connection  
Choose an audio connection that matches your camcorder ( or ), and then make the connection.  
a
b
AUX 2 Input  
Digital  
b
a
AUX 2 Input  
AUX 2 Input  
L
Audio  
R
AUX 2 Input  
Video  
S Video  
A
B
VIDEO  
OUT  
L
AUDIO  
OUT  
R
S VIDEO  
OUT  
OPTICAL  
OUT  
Camcorder, etc.  
Connection  
AV controller  
Signal flow  
Camcorder  
AUX 2 Input S Video  
AUX 2 Input Video  
S-Video output  
A
B
a
Composite video output  
Analog audio L/R output  
Digital optical output  
AUX 2 Input L-Audio-R  
AUX 2 Input Digital  
b
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Connecting the AV Controller—Continued  
Connecting a CD Player or Turntable  
CD Player or Turntable (MM) with Built-in Phono Preamp  
Step 1:  
Choose a connection that matches your CD player (  
,
, or ). Use connection for a turntable with a built-in  
a
b
c
a
phono preamp.  
IN 2  
b
IN  
(VCR/DVR)  
COAXIAL  
L
L
R
R
IN  
a
AUDIO  
OUTPUT  
L
CD  
R
OPTICAL  
Connect one  
or the other  
Connection  
a
IN 2  
(CD)  
CD  
must be  
assigned  
(see page 53)  
b
c
COAXIAL  
OUT  
L
R
Turntable (MM) with  
built-in phono preamp  
AUDIO  
OUT  
OPTICAL  
OUT  
CD player  
• With connection , you can listen to and record audio from the CD player or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.  
a
• To connect the CD player digitally, use connection or . (To record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well,  
b
c
use and , or and .)  
a
b
a
c
Connection  
AV controller  
Signal flow  
CD or turntable  
Analog audio L/R output  
Digital coaxial output  
Digital optical output  
CD IN L/R  
a
b
c
DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 2 (VCR/DVR)  
DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 2 (CD)  
Turntable (MM) with no Phono Preamp Built-in  
The AV controller’s PHONO IN is designed for use with  
a moving magnet (MM) type cartridge.  
Use an analog audio cable to connect the AV controller’s  
PHONO IN L/R jacks to the audio output on your turn-  
table.  
Notes:  
• If your turntable has a ground wire, connect it to the  
AV controller’s GND screw. With some turntables,  
connecting the ground wire may produce an audible  
hum. If this happens, disconnect it.  
IN  
L
R
• If your turntable has a moving coil (MC) type car-  
tridge, you’ll need a commercially available MC head  
amp or MC transformer. Connect your turntable to the  
head amp or transformer, and connect that to the AV  
controller’s PHONO IN L/R jacks.  
PHONO  
AUDIO  
OUTPUT  
L
You can also use a phono equalizer to connect a turn-  
table with an MC-type cartridge. See your phono  
equalizer’s manual for details.  
R
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Connecting the AV Controller—Continued  
Connecting a Cassette, CDR, MiniDisc, or DAT Recorder  
Step 1:  
Choose a connection that matches your recorder (  
,
,
, or ), and then make the connection.  
a
b
c
d
IN  
a
COAXIAL  
b
L
IN 2  
R
(VCR/DVR)  
TAPE  
c
OPTICAL  
a
IN 2  
(CD)  
L
R
OPTICAL  
d
TAPE  
L
R
L
R
Connect one or the other  
COAXIAL  
OUT  
OPTICAL  
OUT  
OPTICAL  
IN  
AUDIO  
IN  
AUDIO  
OUT  
Connection must be  
Cassette, CDR, MD, etc.  
assigned (see page 53)  
• With connection , you can play and record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.  
a
• To connect the recorder digitally for playback, use connections and , or and  
.
a
b
a
c
• To connect the recorder digitally for recording, use connection  
.
d
Connection  
a
AV controller  
Signal flow  
Cassette, CDR, MD, or DAT recorder  
TAPE IN L/R  
TAPE OUT L/R  
Analog audio L/R output  
Analog audio L/R input  
DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 2 (VCR/DVR)  
DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 2 (CD)  
DIGITAL OPTICAL OUT  
Digital coaxial output  
Digital optical output  
b
c
d
Connecting a Balanced Audio Source  
You can connect a balanced audio source to the AV controller’s BALANCE L/R XLR jacks by using two XLR audio  
cables. To use the balanced input, you must assign it to an input selector (see page 54). If you connect a mono source,  
use the BALANCE L XLR jack and set the “Balance Input” setting to “Mono” (see page 54). The AV controller’s  
balanced INPUT XLR jacks are wired as shown.  
2
1
3
Stereo audio source with  
balanced XLR output  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Connecting the AV Controller—Continued  
Connecting an RI Dock  
If Your iPod Doesn’t Support Video:  
Not all iPod models output video. For information  
about which iPod models are supported by the RI  
Dock, see the RI Dock’s instruction manual.  
Connect your RI Dock’s audio output jacks to the  
AV controller’s AUX 1 IN L/R jacks.  
(Onkyo DS-A2X hookup shown below.)  
If Your iPod Supports Video:  
Connect your RI Dock’s audio output jacks to the  
AV controller’s AUX 1 IN L/R jacks, and connect its  
video output jack to the AV controller’s AUX 1 IN V  
jack.  
IN  
L
R
(Onkyo DS-A2X hookup shown below.)  
V
IN  
L
R
If you have an Onkyo DS-A1 RI Dock  
• Connect its video output jack to the AV controller’s AUX 1 jack.  
Notes:  
• Connect the RI Dock to the AV controller with an u cable (see page 44).  
• Set the RI Dock’s RI MODE switch to “HDD” or “HDD/DOCK”.  
• Set the AV controller’s Input Display to “DOCK” (see page 57).  
• By using the [Dock] Remote Mode button on the remote controller of the AV controller to change the remote  
mode to “DOCK”, you can operate your iPod in the RI Dock (see page 20).  
If you cannot operate it, you will need to enter the appropriate remote control code (see page 137).  
• See the RI Dock’s instruction manual for more information.  
Connecting the Power Cords of Other Components (North American model only)  
The AV controller has AC outlet on its rear panel that can be used to  
connect the power cords of other components that you intend to use  
with the AV controller. These components can then be left turned on  
so that they turn on and off as and when the AV controller is set to On  
or Standby.  
Caution:  
• Make sure that the total capacity of the components that you con-  
nect to the AC OUTLET does not exceed the stated capacity.  
Notes:  
• When the “HDMI Control” setting is set to “Enable” (page 126),  
the AC outlet are on all the time regardless of whether the AV con-  
troller is set to On or Standby, or Ready mode in this case, so any  
components connected to them cannot be turned on or off automat-  
ically.  
AC OUTLET  
AC 120V 60Hz  
SWITCHED  
120W 1A MAX.  
• Integra/Onkyo components connected via u should be connected  
directly to a wall outlet, not an AC OUTLET on the AV controller.  
North American model  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Connecting the AV Controller—Continued  
Connecting Integra/Onkyo u Components  
Step 1: Make sure that each Integra/Onkyo component is connected to the AV controller with an analog audio cable  
(RCA).  
Step 2: Make the necessary u connections (see illustration below).  
Step 3: If you’re using an MD, CDR, or RI DOCK component, change the Input Display (see page 57).  
With u (Remote Interactive), you can use the following special functions:  
Auto Power On/Standby  
When you start playback on a component connected via u, if the AV controller is on Standby, it will automatically  
turn on and select that component as the input source. Similarly, when the AV controller is set to Standby, all compo-  
nents connected via u will also go on Standby. This function will not work with components that are connected to an  
AC OUTLET on the AV controller.  
Direct Change  
When playback is started on a component connected via u, the AV controller automatically selects that component as  
the input source. If your DVD player is connected to the AV controller’s multichannel input, you’ll need to press the  
[Audio Sel] button repeatedly and select Multich to hear all channels (see page 129), as the Direct Change u function  
selects the DVD IN L/R jacks.  
Remote Control  
You can use the AV controller’s remote controller to control your other u-capable Integra/Onkyo components. You  
must enter the appropriate remote control code first (see page 138). And remember to point the remote controller at the  
AV controller and not the other component.  
Notes:  
IN  
• Use only u cables for u connections. u cables  
L
are supplied with Integra/Onkyo players (DVD, CD,  
R
etc.).  
CD  
• Some components have two u jacks. You can con-  
FRONT  
nect either one to the AV controller. The other jack is  
L
for connecting additional u-capable components.  
REMOTE  
CONTROL  
R
• Connect only Integra/Onkyo components to u  
jacks. Connecting other manufacturer’s components  
may cause a malfunction.  
DVD  
e.g., CD player  
e.g., DVD player  
• Some components may not support all u functions.  
Refer to the manuals supplied with your other Inte-  
gra/Onkyo components.  
R
L
ANALOG  
AUDIO OUT  
• While Zone 2 or Zone 3 is on, the Auto Power  
On/Standby and Direct Change u functions do not  
work.  
R
L
ANALOG  
AUDIO OUT  
Connecting the Power Cord  
• Before connecting the power cord, connect all your speakers and AV components.  
• Connect the power cord to the AV controller’s AC INLET.  
• Plug the other end of the power cord into a suitable wall outlet.  
• Turning on the AV controller may cause a momentary power surge that might interfere with other electrical equipment  
on the same circuit. If this is a problem, plug the AV controller into a different branch circuit.  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Turning On the AV Controller  
Standby  
On/Standby  
On  
Standby  
TV  
Standby indicator  
Input  
On  
DVD  
1
VCR  
/DVR  
CBL/SAT  
2
AUX 1  
5
3
+
TV CH  
-
AUX 2  
6
Game/TV  
4
Tape  
7
Tuner  
8
CD  
9
TV VOL  
Phono  
D.TUN  
+10  
-- --- 10  
/
Clear  
0
11  
12  
Input Selector  
Macro  
Zone  
3
2
1
2
3
Remote Mode  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
Zone  
CDR/MD  
Receiver  
Cable  
Dock  
Receiver  
Tape/AMP  
Sleep  
Turning On and Standby  
On the AV controller, press the [On/Standby] button.  
On the remote controller, press the [Receiver] Remote Mode button, fol-  
lowed by the [On] button.  
Remote  
controller  
AV controller  
Receiver  
or  
The AV controller comes on, the display lights up, and the Standby indicator goes off.  
Pressing the remote controller’s [On] button again will turn on any components con-  
nected via u.  
On  
To turn the AV controller off, press the [On/Standby] button, or press the remote con-  
troller’s [Standby] button. The AV controller will enter Standby mode. To prevent any  
loud surprises the next time you turn on the AV controller, turn down the volume before  
you turn it off.  
Up and Running in a Few Easy Steps  
To get your system up and running with the minimum of fuss, here’s a few pointers to help you configure the AV  
controller before you use it for the very first time. These settings only need to be made once.  
Do the automatic speaker setup—this is essential!  
®
See “Automatic Speaker Setup (Audyssey MultEQ XT)” on  
page 58.  
Did you connect your TV to an HDMI OUT or COMPONENT  
If you did, see “Monitor Out Setup” on page 49.  
Did you connect a component to an HDMI input,  
Y
HDMI  
component video input, or digital audio input?  
COAXIAL  
PB  
Setup” on page 52, or “Digital Audio Input Setup” on page 53  
PR  
OPTICAL  
respectively.  
Did you connect an Integra/Onkyo MD recorder, CD  
OUT  
IN  
recorder, or RI Dock?  
If you did, see “Changing the Input Display” on page 57.  
TAPE  
MD recorder, CD recorder,  
RI Dock  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
First Time Setup  
This section explains the settings that you need to make before using the AV controller for the very first time.  
Press the [HDMI Out] button.  
The current setting is displayed.  
Monitor Setup  
1
On the “Monitor Out” settings, you can select whether or  
not to have the video sources’ images output through the  
HDMI Out, as well as whether to have the onscreen  
setup menu output through the HDMI Out or through an  
analog output.  
Press the [HDMI Out] button  
repeatedly to select:  
2
1, 2  
Analog:  
Select this if your TV is connected  
to a video output other than the  
HDMI OUT MAIN or HDMI OUT  
SUB.  
HDMI Main:  
Select this if your TV is connected  
to the HDMI OUT MAIN.  
If you connect your TV to the COMPONENT VIDEO  
MONITOR OUT, set the “Monitor Out” setting to “Ana-  
log” so that the onscreen setup menus are displayed and  
composite video and S-Video sources are upconverted*  
and output by the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR  
OUT 1 or 2.  
HDMI Sub:  
Select this if your TV is connected  
to the HDMI OUT SUB.  
Note:  
When “HDMI Main” or “HDMI Sub”  
is selected, the onscreen setup menus  
are output by only the HDMI outputs.  
If you’re not using the HDMI outputs  
and select “HDMI Main” or “HDMI  
Sub” by mistake and the menus dis-  
appear, press the [HDMI Out] button  
to select “Analog”.  
Composite video, S-Video  
IN  
Component video  
OUT  
Composite video, S-Video  
Component video  
Note:  
See page 29 for charts showing how the “Monitor Out”  
and “Resolution” (see pages 49, 50) settings affect the  
video signal flow through the AV controller.  
If you connect your TV to the HDMI OUT MAIN or  
HDMI OUT SUB, set the “Monitor Out” setting to  
“HDMI Main” or “HDMI Sub” so that the onscreen  
setup menus are displayed and composite video, S-  
Video, and component video sources are upconverted*  
and output by the HDMI OUT MAIN or HDMI OUT  
SUB. The onscreen setup menus are displayed on the  
HDMI OUT MAIN or HDMI OUT SUB only.  
Composite video, S-Video,  
component video  
HDMI  
IN  
OUT  
Composite video, S-Video,  
HDMI  
component video  
You can specify the output resolution for the HDMI  
OUT MAIN or HDMI OUT SUB and COMPONENT  
VIDEO MONITOR OUT and have the AV controller  
upconvert the picture resolution as necessary to match  
the resolution supported by your TV (see page 119).  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
First Time Setup—Continued  
In this Instruction Manual, illustrations from the onscreen menu or explanations referring to the menu will be in the  
same language as the Instruction Manual. The default Language setting for the onscreen menu is English. If your  
Instruction Manual is in a language other than English, first follow the instructions below to change the Language.  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
tons to select “Language”, and  
then use the Left and Right  
[e]/[r] buttons to select:  
Selecting the Language used for the  
onscreen setup menus  
4
Enter  
This setting determines the language used for the  
onscreen setup menus. You can select: English, German,  
French, Spanish, Italian, Dutch, Swedish, or Japanese.  
English, German, French, Spanish,  
Italian, Dutch, Swedish, Japanese  
Press the [Receiver] button, fol-  
lowed by the [Setup] button.  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
1
Enter  
Receiver  
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make  
sure the appropriate external input is  
selected on your TV.  
Press the [Setup] button.  
The setup menu closes.  
5
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
2
tons to select “6. Miscella-  
neous”, and then press [Enter].  
The “Miscellaneous” menu appears.  
Enter  
6. Miscellaneous  
1. Volume Setup  
2. OSD Setup  
3. 12V Trigger  
4. 12V Trigger  
5. 12V Trigger  
A
B
C
Setup  
Setup  
Setup  
Enter  
ENTER  
RETURN  
SETUP  
EXIT  
MOVE  
ENTER  
RETURN  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
tons to select “2. OSD Setup”,  
and then press [Enter].  
3
Enter  
The “OSD Setup” menu appears.  
6–2. OSD Setup  
Immediate Display  
Monitor Type  
Display Position  
TV Format  
On  
16 : 9  
Bottom  
Auto  
English  
Enter  
Language  
RETURN  
SETUP  
EXIT  
MOVE  
VALUE  
RETURN  
Note:  
The “TV Format” (*) setting is not  
available on the North American mod-  
els.  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
First Time Setup—Continued  
Input Selector  
Menus for First Time Setup  
2
1
2
Remote Mod
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
Zone  
Submenus  
CDR/MD  
TV  
Cable  
SAT  
Dock  
Receiver  
Tape/AMP  
Sleep  
p. 49  
p. 54  
1
1. Input/Output Assign  
1. Monitor Out  
2. HDMI Input  
3. Component Video Input  
4. Digital Audio Input  
5. Analog Audio Input  
Dimmer  
2
1
+
CH  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
Album  
-
MOVE  
ENTER RETURN EXIT  
ENTER RETURN SETUP  
Prev  
CH  
Display  
Muting  
2. Speaker Setup  
1. Speaker Settings  
2. Speaker Config  
3. Speaker Distance  
4. Level Calibration  
5. Equalizer Settings  
6. THX Audio Setup  
p. 55  
Random  
Using the Onscreen Setup Menus  
MOVE  
ENTER RETURN EXIT  
ENTER RETURN SETUP  
Carry out the settings for the AV controller by using the  
Onscreen Setup Menu.  
Main menu  
MENU  
Press the [Receiver] button fol-  
lowed by the [Setup] button.  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
1. Input/Output Assign  
2. Speaker Setup  
3. Audio Adjust  
1
4. Source Setup  
5. Listening Mode Preset  
6. Miscellaneous  
7. Hardware Setup  
8. Lock Setup  
Receiver  
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make  
sure the appropriate external input is  
selected on your TV.  
ENTER  
RETURN  
SETUP  
RETURN EXIT  
MOVE  
ENTER  
MENU  
1. Input/Output Assign  
2. Speaker Setup  
3. Audio Adjust  
4. Source Setup  
5. Listening Mode Preset  
6. Miscellaneous  
7. Hardware Setup  
8. Lock Setup  
6. Miscellaneous  
1. Volume Setup  
2. OSD Setup  
3. 12V Trigger A Setup  
4. 12V Trigger B Setup  
5. 12V Trigger B Setup  
p. 56  
MOVE  
ENTER RETURN EXIT  
ENTER RETURN SETUP  
ENTER  
RETURN  
SETUP  
EXIT  
MOVE  
ENTER  
RETURN  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
tons to select submenu and then  
press [Enter].  
2
7. Hardware Setup  
1. Remote Control  
2. Zone2/Zone3  
3. Tuner  
4. Analog Multich  
5. HDMI  
6. Network  
p. 57  
Enter  
The submenu appears.  
Press the [Setup] button to close the  
menu.  
MOVE  
ENTER RETURN EXIT  
ENTER RETURN SETUP  
Press the [Return] button to return to  
the previous menu.  
Enter  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
First Time Setup—Continued  
Monitor Out Setup  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
tons to select “1. Input/Output  
Assign”, and then press [Enter].  
The “Input/Output Assign” menu  
appears.  
2
3
Enter  
On  
Standby  
TV  
Input  
DVD  
1
VCR  
/
DVR  
CBL/SAT  
1. Input/Output Assign  
1. Monitor Out  
2. HDMI Input  
3. Component Video Input  
4. Digital Audio Input  
5. Analog Audio Input  
2
AUX 1  
5
3
+
TV CH  
-
AUX 2  
6
Game/TV  
4
Enter  
Tape  
7
Tuner  
8
CD  
9
TV VOL  
Phono  
D.TUN  
+10  
-- --- 10  
/
Clear  
0
11  
12  
Input Selector  
Macro  
Zone  
3
2
1
2
3
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
tons to select “1. Monitor Out”,  
and then press [Enter].  
Remote Mode  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
Zone  
CDR/MD  
TV  
Cable  
SAT  
Dock  
Receiver  
Tape/AMP  
Sleep  
1
Dimmer  
Enter  
The “Monitor Out” menu appears.  
2, 3  
1, 7  
2–6  
+
CH  
Enter  
VOL  
1–1. Monitor Out  
Disc  
Album  
Monitor Out  
Analog  
-
Resolution  
Brightness  
Contrast  
Hue  
Through  
Prev  
CH  
0
0
0
0
Enter  
Display  
Muting  
Random  
Saturation  
Playlist  
Rec  
RETURN  
SETUP  
EXIT  
MOVE  
VALUE  
RETURN  
ening Mode  
If you connect your TV to theCOMPONENT VIDEO  
MONITOR OUT, set the “Monitor Out” setting to  
“Analog” so that the onscreen setup menus are displayed  
and composite video and S-Video sources are upcon-  
verted and output by the COMPONENT VIDEO MON-  
ITOR OUT 1 or 2.  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
tons to select “Monitor Out”, and  
use the Left and Right [e]/[r]  
buttons to select:  
4
Enter  
Analog:  
Select this if your TV is connected  
to a video output other than the  
HDMI OUT MAIN or HDMI OUT  
SUB.  
If you connect your TV to the HDMI OUT MAIN or  
HDMI OUT SUB, set the “Monitor Out” setting to  
“HDMI Main” or “HDMI Sub”, respectively, so that the  
onscreen setup menus are displayed and composite  
video, S-Video, and component video sources are  
upconverted and output by the HDMI OUT MAIN or  
HDMI OUT SUB.  
Enter  
HDMI Main:  
Select this if your TV is connected  
to the HDMI OUT MAIN.  
HDMI Sub:  
Select this if your TV is connected  
to the HDMI OUT SUB.  
You can specify the output resolution for the HDMI out-  
puts and COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT and  
have the AV controller upconvert the picture resolution  
as necessary to match the resolution supported by your  
TV.  
Note:  
When “HDMI Main” or “HDMI Sub”  
is selected, the onscreen setup menus  
are output by only the HDMI outputs.  
If you’re not using the HDMI outputs  
and select “HDMI Main” or “HDMI  
Sub” by mistake and the menus dis-  
appear, press the AV controller’s  
[HDMI Out] button so that “Monitor  
Out: Analog” appears on the display.  
Press the [Receiver] button, fol-  
lowed by the [Setup] button.  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
1
Receiver  
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make  
sure the appropriate external input is  
selected on your TV.  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
First Time Setup—Continued  
Notes:  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
5
• If the video source contains information that restricts  
output at high-resolutions, 720p or 1080i content will  
not be converted.  
• See page 30 for charts showing how the “Monitor  
Out” and “Resolution” settings affect the video signal  
flow through the AV controller.  
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV con-  
troller by using its [Setup] button, arrow buttons, and  
[Enter] button.  
tons to select “Resolution”, and  
use the Left and Right [e]/[r]  
buttons to select:  
Enter  
Through:  
Select this to pass video through the  
AV controller at the same resolution  
and with no conversion.  
Auto:  
Enter  
Select this to have the AV controller  
automatically convert video at reso-  
lutions not supported by your TV.  
(Not available when the “Monitor  
Out” setting is set to “Analog”.)  
Video Input Setup  
HDMI Input Setup  
If you connect a video component to an HDMI IN, you  
must assign that input to an input selector. For example,  
if you connect your DVD player to HDMI IN 1, you  
must assign HDMI IN 1 to the DVD input selector.  
480p:  
Select this for 480p output and  
video conversion as necessary.  
By default, none of the HDMI inputs are assigned.  
720p:  
Select this for 720p output and  
video conversion as necessary.  
1080i:  
If you’ve connected your TV to the AV controller with  
an HDMI cable, you can set the AV controller so that  
composite video, S-Video, and component video sources  
*
are upconverted and output by the HDMI outputs. You  
Select this for 1080i output and  
video conversion as necessary.  
can set this for each input selector by selecting the “- - -”  
option.  
1080p:  
Select this for 1080p output and  
video conversion as necessary. (Not  
available when the “Monitor Out”  
setting is set to “Analog”.)  
Composite video, S-Video,  
component video  
HDMI  
IN  
Source:  
Output will be according to the res-  
olution level which was set with  
Resolution inside Source:  
4-4. Picture Adjust. (Setting for  
each Source becomes possible.)  
OUT  
Composite video, S-Video,  
component video  
HDMI  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
tons to select “Component  
Out2”, and use the Left and Right  
[e]/[r] buttons to select:  
6
Press the [Receiver] button, fol-  
lowed by the [Setup] button.  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
1
Enter  
Receiver  
Monitor:  
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make  
sure the appropriate external input is  
selected on your TV.  
Select this if you’ve connected the  
COMPONENT VIDEO MONI-  
TOR OUT 2/ZONE 2 OUT to a TV  
or other component in your main  
room.  
Enter  
Zone 2:  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
tons to select “1. Input/Output  
Assign”, and then press [Enter].  
The “Input/Output Assign” menu  
appears.  
2
Select this if you’ve connected the  
COMPONENT VIDEO MONI-  
TOR OUT 2/ZONE 2 OUT to a TV  
in Zone 2.  
Enter  
When Monitor is selected, the COM-  
PONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT  
2/ZONE 2 OUT outputs the same video  
as the COMPONENT VIDEO MON-  
ITOR OUT 1.  
1. Input/Output Assign  
1. Monitor Out  
2. HDMI Input  
3. Component Video Input  
4. Digital Audio Input  
5. Analog Audio Input  
Enter  
Press the [Setup] button.  
7
Setup closes.  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
First Time Setup—Continued  
page 49), and the “HDMI Input” setting must be set to  
nal flow and upconversion.  
• When an HDMI IN is assigned to an input selector as  
explained here, the digital audio input for that input  
selector is automatically set to the same HDMI IN.  
See “Digital Audio Input Setup” on page 53.  
• The “TUNER” input selector cannot be assigned and  
is fixed at the “- - -” option.  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
3
tons to select “2. HDMI Input”,  
and then press [Enter].  
Enter  
The “HDMI Input” menu appears.  
1–2. HDMI Input  
DVD  
- - -  
- - -  
- - -  
- - -  
- - -  
- - -  
VCR/DVR  
CBL/SAT  
GAME/TV  
AUX1  
Enter  
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV con-  
troller by using its [Setup] button, arrow buttons, and  
[Enter] button.  
AUX2  
RETURN  
SETUP  
EXIT  
MOVE  
VALUE  
RETURN  
1–2. HDMI Input  
TAPE  
TUNER  
CD  
- - -  
- - -  
- - -  
- - -  
PHONO  
RETURN  
SETUP  
EXIT  
MOVE  
VALUE  
RETURN  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
tons to select an input selector,  
and use the Left and Right  
[e]/[r] buttons to select:  
4
Enter  
HDMI1, HDMI2, HDMI3, HDMI4:  
Select the HDMI IN to which the  
video component has been con-  
nected.  
Enter  
- - -:  
Output composite video, S-Video,  
and component video sources from  
the HDMI Out. The video output  
signal from the HDMI Out is the  
one configured in “Component  
Video Setup” (see page 52).  
Each HDMI IN cannot be assigned to  
more than one input selector. When  
HDMI1 - HDMI4 have already been  
assigned, you must set first any unused  
input selectors to “- - -” or you will be  
unable to assign HDMI1 - HDMI4 to  
input selector.  
Press the [Setup] button.  
Setup closes.  
5
Notes:  
• For composite video, S-Video, and component video  
upconversion for the HDMI OUT MAIN or HDMI  
OUT SUB, the “Monitor Out” setting must be set to  
“HDMI Main” or “HDMI Sub”, respectively (see  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
First Time Setup—Continued  
Component Video Setup  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
tons to select “3. Component  
Video Input”, and then press  
[Enter].  
The “Component Video Input” menu  
appears.  
3
If you connect a video component to a COMPONENT  
VIDEO IN, you must assign that input to an input  
selector. For example, if you connect your DVD player  
to COMPONENT VIDEO IN 3, you must assign COM-  
PONENT VIDEO IN 3 to the DVD input selector.  
Enter  
By default, the DVD input selector is assigned to COM-  
PONENT VIDEO IN 1, and all of the other input selec-  
tors are assigned to the “- - -” option.  
1–3. Component Video Input  
Enter  
DVD  
IN1  
- - -  
- - -  
- - -  
- - -  
- - -  
VCR/DVR  
CBL/SAT  
GAME/TV  
AUX1  
Input selector  
DVD  
Default assignment  
AUX2  
IN1  
- - -  
VCR/DVR  
CBL/SAT  
GAME/TV  
AUX1  
RETURN  
SETUP  
EXIT  
MOVE  
VALUE  
RETURN  
- - -  
- - -  
1–3. Component Video Input  
TAPE  
TUNER  
CD  
- - -  
- - -  
- - -  
- - -  
- - -  
AUX2  
- - -  
PHONO  
TAPE  
- - -  
TUNER  
CD  
- - - (Fixed)  
- - -  
RETURN  
SETUP  
EXIT  
MOVE  
VALUE  
RETURN  
PHONO  
- - -  
If you’ve connected your TV to the AV controller with a  
component video cable, you can set the AV controller so  
that composite video and S-Video sources are upcon-  
verted* and output by the COMPONENT VIDEO MON-  
ITOR OUT 1 or 2. You can set this for each input  
selector by selecting the “- - -” option.  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
tons to select an input selector,  
and use the Left and Right  
[e]/[r] buttons to select:  
4
Enter  
IN1: Use the video component  
connected to COMPONENT  
VIDEO IN 1.  
Composite video, S-Video  
Component video  
IN2: Use the video component  
connected to COMPONENT  
VIDEO IN 2.  
IN  
Enter  
IN3: Use the video component  
connected to COMPONENT  
VIDEO IN 3.  
- - -: Output composite video and  
S-Video sources from the  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
MONITOR OUT.  
OUT  
Composite video, S-Video  
Component video  
Press the [Receiver] button, fol-  
lowed by the [Setup] button.  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
1
Receiver  
Press the [Setup] button.  
Setup closes.  
5
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make  
sure the appropriate external input is  
selected on your TV.  
Notes:  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
tons to select “1. Input/Output  
Assign”, and then press [Enter].  
The “Input/Output Assign” menu  
appears.  
• For composite video and S-Video upconversion for  
the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT 1 or 2,  
the “Monitor Out” setting must be set to “Analog”  
(see page 49), and the “Component Video Input” set-  
ting must be set to “- - -”. See page 30 for more infor-  
mation on video signal flow and upconversion.  
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV con-  
troller by using its [Setup] button, arrow buttons, and  
[Enter] button.  
2
Enter  
1. Input/Output Assign  
1. Monitor Out  
2. HDMI Input  
3. Component Video Input  
4. Digital Audio Input  
5. Analog Audio Input  
Enter  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
First Time Setup—Continued  
Digital Audio Input Setup  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
tons to select an input selector,  
and then use the Left and Right  
“COAX1”, “COAX2”, “COAX3”,  
“OPT1”, “OPT2”, or “- - - (ana-  
log)”.  
4
If you connect a component to a digital audio input, you  
must assign that input to an input selector. For example,  
if you connect your CD player to OPTICAL IN 2, you  
must assign OPTICAL IN 2 to the “CD” input selector.  
Enter  
Here are the default assignments.  
• When an HDMI IN is assigned to an  
input selector in “HDMI Input  
Setup” on page 50, this input assign-  
ment is automatically set to the same  
HDMI IN. And in addition to the  
etc.), you can also select HDMI  
inputs.  
Input selector  
DVD  
Default assignment  
COAX1  
Enter  
VCR/DVR  
CBL/SAT  
GAME/TV  
AUX1  
COAX2  
COAX3  
OPT1  
- - -  
• “AUX2” is used only for digital input  
from the front panel terminals. When  
HDMI IN is assigned to “AUX2” in  
the “HDMI Input Setup” on page 50,  
the same HDMI IN can be selected.  
AUX2  
FRONT (Fixed)  
- - -  
TAPE  
TUNER  
CD  
- - - (Fixed)  
OPT2  
Examples:  
PHONO  
- - -  
If you connect your DVD player to the  
OPTICAL IN 1 jack, set “DVD” to  
“OPT1”.  
If you want to listen to audio from the  
component connected to the OPTICAL  
IN 2 jack when the VCR/DVR input  
selector is selected, set “VCR/DVR” to  
“OPT2”.  
If you want to listen to audio from the  
component connected to the COAX-  
IAL IN 1 jack when the CBL/SAT  
input selector is selected, set  
“CBL/SAT” to “COAX1”.  
Press the [Receiver] button, fol-  
lowed by the [Setup] button.  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
1
2
Receiver  
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make  
sure the appropriate external input is  
selected on your TV.  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
tons to select “1. Input/Output  
Assign”, and then press [Enter].  
The “Input/Output Assign” menu  
appears.  
For input selectors that you don’t want  
to assign a digital input jack, set to  
“- - - (analog)”.  
Enter  
Press the [Setup] button.  
Setup closes.  
5
1. Input/Output Assign  
1. Monitor Out  
2. HDMI Input  
Enter  
3. Component Video Input  
4. Digital Audio Input  
5. Analog Audio Input  
Notes:  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
tons to select “4. Digital Audio  
Input”, and then press [Enter].  
The “Digital Audio Input” menu  
appears.  
• Only FRONT can be assigned to the AUX 2 input  
selector.  
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV con-  
troller by using its [Setup] button, arrow buttons, and  
[Enter] button.  
3
Enter  
1–4. Digital Audio Input  
DVD  
COAX1  
COAX2  
COAX3  
OPT1  
- - -  
FRONT  
- - -  
- - -  
VCR/DVR  
CBL/SAT  
GAME/TV  
AUX  
Enter  
AUX2  
TAPE  
TUNER  
CD  
PHONO  
OPT2  
- - -  
RETURN  
SETUP  
EXIT  
MOVE  
VALUE  
RETURN  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
First Time Setup—Continued  
Analog Audio Input Setup  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
tons to select “5. Analog Audio  
Input”, and then press [Enter].  
The “Analog Audio Input” menu  
appears.  
3
Enter  
On  
Standby  
TV  
Input  
DVD  
1
VCR  
/
DVR  
CBL/SAT  
2
AUX 1  
5
3
+
TV CH  
-
1–5. Analog Audio Input  
AUX 2  
6
Game/TV  
Multich  
DVD  
CD  
Stereo  
Balance  
Balance Input  
4
Enter  
Tape  
7
Tuner  
8
CD  
9
TV VOL  
Phono  
D.TUN  
+10  
-- --- 10  
/
Clear  
0
11  
12  
Input Selector  
Macro  
Zone  
3
2
1
2
3
Remote Mode  
RETURN  
SETUP  
EXIT  
VALUE  
RETURN  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
Zone  
CDR/MD  
TV  
Cable  
SAT  
Dock  
Receiver  
Tape/AMP  
Sleep  
1
Dimmer  
Use the Left and Right [e]/[r]  
buttons to select an input selec-  
tor.  
You can assign the multichannel input  
to the following input selectors:  
“DVD”, “VCR/DVR”, “CBL/SAT”,  
“GAME/TV”, “AUX1”, “AUX2”,  
TAPE”, “CD”, or “PHONO”.  
4
5
2, 3  
1, 7  
2–6  
+
CH  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
Album  
Enter  
-
Prev  
CH  
Display  
Muting  
Playlist  
Rec  
Random  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
tons to select “Balance”, and use  
the Left and Right [e]/[r] but-  
tons to select an input selector:  
You can assign the balanced input to  
the following input selectors: DVD,  
“DVD”, “VCR/DVR”, “CBL/SAT”,  
“GAME/TV”, “AUX1”, “AUX2”,  
TAPE”, “CD”, or “PHONO”.  
tening Mode  
Enter  
If you connect a component to the AV controller’s analog  
multichannel input, you must assign that input to an  
input selector. For example, if you connect your DVD  
player to the MULTI CH input, you must assign it to the  
DVD input selector.  
If you connect a component to the AV controller’s bal-  
anced input, you must assign that input to an input  
selector. For example, if you connect your CD player to  
the BALANCED input, you must assign it to the CD  
input selector.  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
tons to select “Balance Input”,  
and use the Left and Right  
[e]/[r] buttons to select:  
6
7
Enter  
Stereo:  
Press the [Receiver] button, fol-  
lowed by the [Setup] button.  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
Select if the source is stereo and  
you’ve connected it to the BAL-  
ANCED L and R INPUT XLR jacks.  
1
Receiver  
Mono:  
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make  
sure the appropriate external input is  
selected on your TV.  
Select if the source is mono and  
you’ve connected it to the BAL-  
ANCED L INPUT XLR jack.  
Press the [Setup] button.  
Setup closes.  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
2
tons to select “1. Input/Output  
Assign”, and then press [Enter].  
Enter  
The “Input/Output Assign” menu  
appears.  
Notes:  
• To listen to the component connected to the multi-  
channel input, press the [Audio Sel] button repeatedly  
to select Multich (see page 129).  
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV con-  
troller by using its [Setup] button, arrow buttons, and  
[Enter] button.  
1. Input/Output Assign  
1. Monitor Out  
2. HDMI Input  
Enter  
3. Component Video Input  
4. Digital Audio Input  
5. Analog Audio Input  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
First Time Setup—Continued  
Speaker Settings  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
tons to select “1. Speaker Set-  
tings”, and then press [Enter].  
The “Speaker Settings” menu appears.  
3
4
-
4
5
6
If you change these settings,you must run the auto-  
Enter  
matic speaker setup again (see page 58).  
2
1
2
2–1. Speaker Settings  
Remote Mod
Speaker Type Front  
Normal  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
Zone  
CDR/MD  
TV  
Cable  
SAT  
Dock  
Receiver  
Tape/AMP  
Sleep  
Enter  
1
Dimmer  
2, 3  
1, 5  
2–4  
+
CH  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
Album  
RETURN  
SETUP  
EXIT  
MOVE  
VALUE  
RETURN  
-
Prev  
CH  
Display  
Muting  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
tons to select “Speaker Type”,  
and use the Left and Right  
[e]/[r] buttons to select:  
Random  
Enter  
To use bi-amping, you must change the “Speaker Type”  
setting. For hookup information, see page 25.  
Normal:  
Select this if you’ve connected your  
front speakers normally.  
Notes:  
• When bi-amping is used, the AV controller is able to  
drive up to 5.1 speakers in the main room.  
• Before you change these settings, turn down the vol-  
ume.  
Bi-Amp:  
Select this if you’ve connected your  
front speakers for bi-amped opera-  
tion.  
The onscreen menus shown in this manual may be  
slightly different from what you see on your TV.  
Press the [Setup] button.  
Setup closes.  
5
Press the [Receiver] button, fol-  
lowed by the [Setup] button.  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
1
Receiver  
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make  
sure the appropriate external input is  
selected on your TV.  
Note:  
This procedure can also be performed on the AV control-  
ler by using its [Setup] button, arrow buttons, and [Enter]  
button.  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
2
tons to select “2. Speaker  
Setup”, and then press [Enter].  
The “Speaker Setup” menu appears.  
Enter  
2. Speaker Setup  
1. Speaker Settings  
2. Speaker Config  
3. Speaker Distance  
4. Level Calibration  
5. Equalizer Settings  
6. THX Audio Setup  
Enter  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
First Time Setup—Continued  
TV Format Setup  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
tons to select “TV Format”, and  
then use the Left and Right  
[e]/[r] buttons to select:  
Auto: Select this to have the AV  
controller automatically  
detect the TV system from the  
video input signals.  
NTSC: Select if the TV system in  
your area is NTSC.  
4
(not North American models)  
For the onscreen setup menus to display properly, you  
must specify the TV system used in your area.  
Enter  
Press the [Receiver] button, fol-  
lowed by the [Setup] button.  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
1
Receiver  
Enter  
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make  
sure the appropriate external input is  
selected on your TV.  
PAL: Select if the TV system in  
your area is PAL.  
Press the [Setup] button.  
Setup closes.  
5
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
2
tons to select “6. Miscella-  
neous”, and then press [Enter].  
The “Miscellaneous” menu appears.  
Enter  
Note:  
6. Miscellaneous  
This procedure can also be performed on the AV control-  
ler by using its [Setup] button, arrow buttons, and [Enter]  
button.  
1. Volume Setup  
2. OSD Setup  
3. 12V Trigger  
4. 12V Trigger  
5. 12V Trigger  
A
B
C
Setup  
Setup  
Setup  
Enter  
ENTER  
RETURN  
SETUP  
EXIT  
MOVE  
ENTER  
RETURN  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
tons to select “2. OSD Setup”,  
and then press [Enter].  
3
Enter  
The “OSD Setup” menu appears.  
6–2. OSD Setup  
Immediate Display  
Monitor Type  
Display Position  
TV Format  
On  
16 : 9  
Bottom  
Auto  
English  
Enter  
Language  
RETURN  
SETUP  
EXIT  
MOVE  
VALUE  
RETURN  
Note:  
The “TV Format” (*) setting is not  
available on the North American mod-  
els.  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
First Time Setup—Continued  
AM Frequency Step Setup  
(on some models)  
Press the [Setup] button.  
Setup closes.  
5
For AM tuning to work properly, you must specify the  
AM frequency step used in your area. Note that when  
this setting is changed, all radio presets are deleted.  
Note:  
Press the [Receiver] button, fol-  
lowed by the [Setup] button.  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
1
This procedure can also be performed on the AV control-  
ler by using its [Setup] button, arrow buttons, and [Enter]  
button.  
Receiver  
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make  
sure the appropriate external input is  
selected on your TV.  
Changing the Input Display  
If you connect an u-capable Onkyo MiniDisc  
recorder, CD recorder, or RI Dock to the TAPE IN/OUT  
jacks, or connect an RI Dock to the AUX 1 jacks, for u  
to work properly, you must change this setting.  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
2
This setting can only be changed on the AV controller.  
tons to select “7. Hardware  
Setup”, and then press [Enter].  
The “Hardware Setup” menu appears.  
Enter  
7. Hardware Setup  
1. Remote Control  
2. Zone2/Zone3  
3. Tuner  
4. Analog Multich  
5. HDMI  
6. Network  
Enter  
1, 2 1, 2  
ENTER  
RETURN  
SETUP  
EXIT  
MOVE  
ENTER  
RETURN  
Press the [Tape] or [AUX 1] input  
selector button so that “TAPE” or  
“AUX1” appears on the display.  
1
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
tons to select “3. Tuner”, and  
then press [Enter].  
3
4
The “Tuner” menu appears.  
Enter  
or  
7–3. Tuner  
AM Freq Step  
9kHz  
Enter  
Press and hold down the [Tape]  
2
or [AUX 1] input selector button  
(about 3 seconds) to change the  
setting.  
Repeat this step to select MD, CDR, or  
DOCK.  
RETURN  
SETUP  
EXIT  
VALUE  
RETURN  
(3 seconds)  
or  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
tons to select “AM Freq Step”,  
and then use the Left and Right  
[e]/[r] buttons to select:  
10kHz: Select if 10 kHz steps are  
used in your area.  
For the Tape input selector, the setting  
changes in this order:  
Enter  
TAPE MD CDR  
(3 seconds)  
DOCK  
9kHz: Select if 9 kHz steps are used  
in your area.  
For the AUX 1 input selector, the set-  
ting changes in this order:  
Enter  
AUX1 DOCK  
Note:  
DOCK can be selected for the Tape input selector or  
AUX 1 input selector, but not both at the same time.  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
First Time Setup—Continued  
Measurement Positions  
Automatic Speaker Setup  
(Audyssey MultEQ® XT)  
To create a listening environment in your home theater  
that all listeners will enjoy, Audysssey MultEQ takes  
®
measurements at up to eight positions within the lis-  
tening area.  
With the supplied calibrated microphone, Audyssey  
MultEQ XT automatically determines the number of  
speakers connected, their size for purposes of bass  
management, optimum crossover frequencies to the  
subwoofer (if present), and distances from the primary  
listening position.  
1st measurement position  
This is the center position of your listening area, or  
the listening position if there’s only one listener.  
Audyssey MultEQ XT then removes the distortion  
caused by room acoustics by capturing room acoustical  
problems over the listening area in both the frequency  
and time domain. The result is clear, well-balanced  
sound for everyone. Enabling Audyssey MultEQ XT  
allows you to also use Audyssey Dynamic EQ™, which  
maintains the proper octave-to-octave balance at any  
volume level.  
2nd–8th measurement positions  
These are the other listening positions (i.e., the  
places where the other listeners will sit). You can  
measure up to eight positions.  
The following examples show some typical home theater  
seating arrangements. Choose the one that best matches  
yours, and position the microphone accordingly when  
prompted.  
Before using this function, connect and position all of  
your speakers.  
TV  
TV  
TV  
TV  
TV  
About Audyssey Dynamic Volume  
Audyssey Dynamic Volume solves the problem of  
large variations in volume level between television  
programs, commercials, and between the soft and  
loud passages of movies. Dynamic Volume looks at  
the preferred volume setting by the user and then  
monitors how the volume of program material is  
being perceived by listeners in real time to decide  
whether an adjustment is needed. Whenever  
necessary, Dynamic Volume makes the necessary  
rapid or gradual adjustments to maintain the desired  
playback volume level while optimizing the dynamic  
range. Audyssey Dynamic EQ is integrated into  
Dynamic Volume so that as the playback volume is  
adjusted automatically, the perceived bass response,  
tonal balance, surround impression, and dialog  
clarity remain the same whether watching movies,  
flipping between television channels, or changing  
from stereo to surround sound content.  
TV  
TV  
TV  
TV  
About Audyssey Dynamic EQ  
Audyssey Dynamic EQ solves the problem of  
deteriorating sound quality as volume is decreased by  
taking into account human perception and room  
acoustics. Dynamic EQ selects the correct frequency  
response and surround levels moment-by-moment at  
any user-selected volume setting. The result is bass  
response, tonal balance, and surround impression  
that remain constant despite changes in volume.  
Dynamic EQ combines information from incoming  
source levels with actual output sound levels in the  
room, a prerequisite for delivering a loudness  
correction solution. Audyssey Dynamic EQ works in  
tandem with Audyssey MultEQ to provide well-  
balanced sound for every listener at any volume level.  
: listening area  
: listening position  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
First Time Setup—Continued  
®
Using Audyssey MultEQ XT  
The onscreen menus shown in this manual may be  
slightly different from what you see on your TV.  
1
Turn on the AV controller and the  
connected TV.  
1
On the TV, select the input to which the  
AV controller is connected.  
Place the speaker setup micro-  
2
phone at measurement point 1  
(page 58), and connect it to the  
Setup Mic jack.  
2, 11  
Setup Mic  
Auto Speaker Setup  
Next  
1
Please place microphone at center of listening area at  
ear height.  
2
ENTER  
ENTER  
Remote
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
Zone  
CDR/MD  
Notes:  
TV  
Cable  
SAT  
Dock  
Receiver  
Tape/AMP  
Sleep  
®
Before starting Audyssey MultEQ XT  
Automatic Speaker Setup, arrange  
the room and connect the speakers as  
you would for enjoying movies.  
Changes to the room after auto setup  
requires you run the auto setup again,  
as room EQ characteristics may have  
changed.  
Dimmer  
,
Enter  
+
CH  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
Album  
-
Prev  
CH  
Display  
Muting  
• When starting the automatic speaker  
setup, do not stand between the  
speakers and microphone, and avoid  
obstacles blocking the path between  
speakers and microphone. This will  
produce inaccurate results.  
• Position the microphone at ear height  
of a seated listener with the micro-  
phone tip pointed directly at the ceil-  
ing using a tripod. Do not hold the  
microphone in your hand during  
measurements as this will produce  
innacurate results.  
• Make the room as quiet as possible.  
Background noise can disrupt the  
room measurements. Close win-  
dows, silence cell phones, televi-  
sions, radios, air conditioners,  
fluorescent lights, home appliances,  
light dimmers, or other devices.  
• Cell phones should be turned off or  
placed away from all audio electron-  
ics during the measurement process  
as Radio Frequency Interference  
(RFI) may cause measurement dis-  
ruptions (even if the cell phone is not  
in use).  
adm  
Surround  
Stereo  
Notes:  
• If the AV controller is muted, it will be unmuted  
automatically when the automatic speaker setup  
starts.  
• Automatic speaker setup cannot be performed  
while a pair of headphones is connected.  
• It takes about 15 minutes to complete the auto-  
matic speaker setup for three positions. Total mea-  
surement time varies depending on the number of  
positions and speakers.  
• Do not disconnect the speaker setup microphone  
during the automatic speaker setup, unless you  
want to cancel the setup.  
• Do not connect or disconnect any speakers during  
the automatic speaker setup.  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
First Time Setup—Continued  
Press [Enter].  
The automatic speaker setup starts.  
The following screen appears.  
3
5
Auto Speaker Setup  
Next  
Enter  
Auto Speaker Setup  
Do not unplug Setup Mic.  
Please keep quiet.  
Now measuring. . .  
2
2
Please place microphone at next position at ear height.  
ENTER  
ENTER  
Test tones are played through each  
®
speaker as Audyssey MultEQ XT  
Automatic Speaker Setup runs. This  
process takes a few minutes. Please  
refrain from talking during  
measurements and do not stand  
between speakers and the microphone.  
Place the setup microphone at  
the next position (see page 58),  
and then press [Enter].  
Audyssey MultEQ XT performs more  
measurements. This takes a few minutes.  
Enter  
®
The speaker detect results  
appear.  
Auto Speaker Setup  
4
Do not unplug Setup Mic.  
Please keep quiet.  
Auto Speaker Setup  
Now measuring. . .  
Enter  
Next  
2
Retry  
Cancel  
When prompted, place the setup  
microphone at the next position,  
and repeat step 5.  
:Yes  
:No  
6
7
Enter  
Speaker Detect Result  
ENTER  
MOVE  
ENTER  
Yes” means that the speaker was  
detected. “No” means that no speaker  
was detected.  
After the 3rd or 7th measure-  
ment, the following screen  
appears.  
If you agree with the results, use  
the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons  
to select “Next”, and then press  
[Enter].  
Enter  
Auto Speaker Setup  
Next  
Finish(Calculate )  
The options are:  
Enter  
Next: Proceed to the next step.  
Retry: Return to step 2 and try again.  
Cancel: Cancel the automatic speaker  
setup.  
Select [Next] to measure the next position, or select  
[Finish] to calculate the Audyssey MultEQ room EQ  
solution.  
ENTER  
MOVE  
ENTER  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
tons to select an option, and then  
press [Enter].  
Next:  
Select “Next” to begin measuring  
the next measurement position.  
After the 8th measurement has been  
taken, the procedure automatically  
proceeds to step 8.  
Finish(Calculate):  
Select this if you don’t want to  
measure any more listening posi-  
tions and are ready to calculate the  
results, then go to step 8.  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
First Time Setup—Continued  
Disconnect the setup Mic.  
When the measurements are  
complete, the following screen  
appears.  
11  
8
Auto Speaker Setup  
Auto Speaker Setup  
Please, unplug Setup Mic.  
Calculating...  
Notes:  
• When the automatic speaker setup is complete, the  
“Equalizer Settings” (page 110) will be set to Audys-  
sey.  
You can cancel the automatic speaker setup at any  
point in the procedure simply by disconnecting the  
setup microphone.  
When the calculations are com-  
plete, the following screen  
appears.  
9
Enter  
Auto Speaker Setup  
Save  
Review SP Config  
Review SP Distance  
Review SP Level  
Cancel  
Enter  
ENTER  
MOVE  
ENTER  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
tons to select an option, and then  
press [Enter].  
Save:  
Save the calculated settings and exit  
the automatic speaker setup.  
Review SP Config:  
Review the speaker configuration  
settings (see “Reviewing the  
Results” on page 63).  
Review SP Distance:  
Review the speaker distance set-  
tings (see “Reviewing the Results”  
on page 63).  
Review SP Level:  
Review the speaker level settings  
(see “Reviewing the Results” on  
page 63).  
Cancel:  
Cancel the automatic speaker setup.  
If you selected “Save”, the results are  
saved, and the following screen  
appears.  
10  
Auto Speaker Setup  
Saving...  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
First Time Setup—Continued  
Error Messages  
Auto Speaker Setup  
While the automatic speaker setup is in progress, one of  
the following error messages may appear:  
Next  
Cancel  
Ambient noise is too high  
:Yes  
:No  
!
:---  
:Error  
Auto Speaker Setup  
Speaker Detect Error  
!
ENTER  
MOVE  
ENTER  
Retry  
Cancel  
The surround back left speaker has not been detected.  
Auto Speaker Setup  
Next  
Cancel  
Ambient noise is too high.  
!
ENTER  
MOVE  
ENTER  
!
:Yes  
:---  
:No  
This message appears if the background noise is too  
loud and the measurements cannot be performed  
properly.  
!
:Error  
Speaker Detect Error  
!
ENTER  
MOVE  
ENTER  
Remove the source of the noise and try again.  
Retry: Return to the measured point immediately  
before and start set up again.  
There is a problem with the front left speaker. If the  
warning triangle ( ) appears for the subwoofer, it may  
be that the output from the subwoofer is too loud.  
Cancel: Cancel the automatic speaker setup.  
Speaker Detect Error  
Auto Speaker Setup  
Retry  
Cancel  
Auto Speaker Setup  
Next  
Cancel  
:Yes  
:---  
:No  
!
Speaker Detect Error  
!
:Error  
ENTER  
MOVE  
ENTER  
Speaker Detect Error  
!
ENTER  
MOVE  
ENTER  
The number of speakers detected on the second or  
third measurement was different to the number  
detected on the first measurement.  
This message appears if a speaker is not detected. “Yes”  
means that a speaker was detected. “No” means that no  
speaker was detected. Check your speaker connections  
and retry, or cancel the automatic speaker setup.  
Make sure speakers that cannot be detected are con-  
nected property.  
Retry: Return to step 2 and try again.  
Cancel: Cancel the automatic speaker setup.  
Auto Speaker Setup  
Next  
Cancel  
Writing Error!  
:Yes  
:---  
:No  
Auto Speaker Setup  
!
:Error  
Retry  
Cancel  
Speaker Detect Error  
!
ENTER  
MOVE  
ENTER  
The front right speaker has not been detected.  
Writing Error!  
!
ENTER  
MOVE  
ENTER  
Auto Speaker Setup  
Next  
Cancel  
This message appears if saving fails.  
Try saving again. If this message appears after 2 or 3  
attempts, the AV controller is probably malfunctioning.  
Contact your Onkyo dealer.  
:Yes  
:---  
:No  
!
:Error  
Speaker Detect Error  
!
Retry: Return to step 2 and try again.  
ENTER  
MOVE  
ENTER  
Cancel: Cancel the automatic speaker setup.  
The surround right speaker has not been detected.  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
First Time Setup—Continued  
Reviewing the Results  
Changing the Speaker Settings Manually  
In rare situations, proper measurements taken may not  
be obtainable by the by the automatic speaker setup. For  
example, there may be too much noise in the room. If  
running the speaker setup a second time is still unsuc-  
cessful you will have to set the speaker settings manu-  
ally. (see pages 104–110).  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
tons to select the settings that  
you want to review, and then  
press [Enter].  
Enter  
Auto Speaker Setup  
Notes:  
Save  
Enter  
• For THX-certified speakers, the 80 Hz (THX) cross-  
over frequency is recommended. If you use the auto-  
matic speaker setup, you’ll need to manually select  
80 Hz (THX) for each THX-certified speaker (see  
page 104).  
Review SP Config  
Review SP Distance  
Review SP Level  
Cancel  
ENTER  
MOVE  
ENTER  
• Because of the complexities of low-frequency sounds  
and the way they interact with a room, THX recom-  
mends setting the subwoofer level and distance manu-  
ally.  
The options are:  
Review SP Config  
Review the speaker configuration  
settings.  
Using a Powered Subwoofer  
If you’re using a powered subwoofer and it outputs very  
low-frequency sound at a low volume level, it may not be  
detected by the automatic speaker setup.  
Auto Speaker Setup  
Review SP Config  
Subwoofer  
Front  
Yes  
Full Band  
80Hz  
100Hz  
150Hz  
2ch  
If the “Subwoofer” appears on the “Review SP Config”  
screen as “No”, increase the subwoofer’s volume to the  
half-way point, set it to its highest crossover frequency,  
and then try running the automatic speaker setup again.  
Note that if the volume is set too high and the sound dis-  
torts, detection issues may occur, so use an appropriate  
volume level. If the subwoofer has a low-pass filter  
switch, set it to Off or Direct. Refer to your subwoofer’s  
instruction manual for details.  
Center  
Surround  
Surr Back  
Surr Back Ch  
RETURN  
RETURN  
Review SP Distance  
Review the speaker distance set-  
tings.  
Auto Speaker Setup  
Review SP Distance  
Left  
15.0ft  
15.0ft  
15.0ft  
7.0ft  
Center  
Rightr  
Surr Right  
SurrBack  
Surr Left  
Subwoofer  
7.0ft  
7.0ft  
15.0ft  
RETURN  
RETURN  
Review SP Level  
Review the speaker level settings.  
Auto Speaker Setup  
Review SP Level  
Left  
+12.0dB  
0.0dB  
-12.0dB  
+3.0dB  
+4.0dB  
-3.0dB  
0.0dB  
Center  
Rightr  
Surr Right  
SurrBack  
Surr Left  
Subwoofer  
RETURN  
RETURN  
Press [Return] to return to the previous  
screen.  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operations  
Selecting the Input Source  
On  
Standby  
TV  
3
Input  
DVD  
1
VCR  
/
DVR  
CBL/SAT  
2
AUX z  
5
3
+
TV CH  
-
AUX 2  
6
Game/TV  
4
Tape  
7
Tuner  
8
CD  
9
1
TV VOL  
Phono  
D.TUN  
+10  
-- --- 10  
/
Clear  
0
11  
12  
Input Selector  
Macro  
Zone  
3
2
1
2
3
Remote Mode  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
Zone  
CDR/MD  
TV  
Cable  
SAT  
Dock  
Receiver  
Tape/AMP  
Sleep  
1
3
Dimmer  
1
+
CH  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
Album  
-
Pr
i
Use the AV controller’s input selector buttons to select an input source.  
1
Remote  
controller  
AV controller  
To select an input source with the remote controller, press its [Receiver]  
Remote Mode button, and then use its Input Selector buttons.  
Receiver  
DVD  
1
VCR  
/
DVR  
CBL/SAT  
2
AUX 1  
5
3
AUX 2  
6
Game/TV  
4
Tape  
7
CD  
9
Tuner  
8
Phono  
+10  
Start playback on the source component.  
2
3
When you select DVD or another video component, on your TV, you’ll need to select  
the video input that’s connected to the AV controller’s COMPONENT VIDEO MON-  
ITOR OUT 1, COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT 2/ZONE 2 OUT, HDMI OUT  
MAIN, HDMI OUT SUB, or MONITOR OUT.  
On some DVD players, you may need to turn on the digital audio output.  
To adjust the volume, use the Master Volume control, or the remote con-  
troller’s VOL [q]/[w] button.  
Remote  
controller  
AV controller  
The volume can be set to dB, 81.5 dB through +18.0 dB (relative display).  
The AV controller is designed for home theater enjoyment. It has a wide volume range,  
allowing precise adjustment.  
VOL  
The volume level can also be displayed as an absolute value. See “Volume Setup” on  
page 123.  
Select a listening mode and enjoy!  
See “Using the Listening Modes” on page 90.  
4
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Basic Operations—Continued  
This section explains functions that can be used with any  
input source.  
Adjusting Speaker Levels  
-
Tape  
7
Tu
8
9
You can adjust the volume of each speaker while listen-  
ing to an input source. These temporary adjustments are  
cancelled when the AV controller is set to Standby.  
TV VOL  
Phono  
D.TUN  
+10  
-- --- 10  
/
Clear  
0
11  
12  
Input Selector  
Macro  
Zone  
3
2
1
2
3
Press  
[Receiver]  
first  
Remote Mode  
Use the remote controller’s [CH  
CH Sel  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
Zone  
CDR/MD  
Sel] button to select each  
speaker, and use the [Level–] and  
[Level+] buttons to adjust the vol-  
ume.  
TV  
Cable  
SAT  
Dock  
Receiver  
Tape/AMP  
Sleep  
Dimmer  
Dimmer  
Display  
Sleep  
Level  
-
Level+  
+
CH  
You can adjust the volume of each  
speaker from –12 dB to +12 dB  
(–15 dB to +12 dB for the subwoofer).  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
Album  
-
Prev  
CH  
Muting  
Display  
Muting  
Playlist  
Rec  
Random  
Listening Mode  
Surround  
Stereo  
Notes:  
Repeat  
Audio  
Direct  
Subtitle  
THX  
Play Mode  
All ST  
You cannot use this function while the AV controller  
is muted.  
• Speakers that are set to “No” or “None” in the  
“Speaker Config” cannot be adjusted (see page 104).  
Test Tone  
CH Sel  
Level  
-
Level+  
CH Sel  
Open/Close Video Off  
Audio Sel  
Level – +  
L
Night  
DVD  
Re-EQ  
HDD  
VCR  
RC-691M  
Headphones  
While a pair of headphones is connected, you can use the  
[CH Sel], [Level–], and [Level+] buttons to adjust the  
volume of each headphone speaker (left and right), from  
–12 dB to +12 dB each.  
These settings are stored when the AV controller is set to  
Standby.  
Phones  
Dimmer Display  
Muting the AV Controller  
You can temporarily mute the output of the AV control-  
ler.  
Setting the Display Brightness  
You can adjust the brightness of the display.  
Press the remote controller’s  
[Muting] button.  
Remote  
controller  
Dimmer  
Press the remote controller’s  
[Dimmer] button repeatedly to  
select: Normal, Dim, or Dimmer.  
You can also use the AV controller’s  
[Dimmer] button (not Australian mod-  
Muting  
The output is muted and the MUTING  
indicator flashes on the display, as  
shown.  
AV controller  
els).  
To unmute the AV controller, press the  
[Muting] button again, or adjust the  
volume.  
the AV controller is set to Standby.  
Tip:  
You can specify how much the output is muted with the  
“Muting Level” setting (see page 123).  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Basic Operations—Continued  
Using the Sleep Timer  
Adjusting the Bass & Treble  
With the sleep timer, you can set the AV controller to  
turn off automatically after a specified period.  
You can adjust the bass and treble for the front speakers,  
except when the Direct or THX listening mode is  
selected.  
Press the [Receiver] button, and  
then press the [Sleep] button  
repeatedly to select the required  
sleep time.  
The sleep time can be set from 90 to 10  
minutes in 10 minute steps.  
Receiver  
Press the AV controller’s [Tone]  
1
button repeatedly to select Bass  
or Treble for Front, Center, Sur-  
round, SurrBack, or Subwoofer.  
Sleep  
Use the Tone Plus [+] and Minus  
[–] buttons to adjust.  
2
The SLEEP indicator appears on the  
display when the sleep timer has been  
set. The specified sleep time appears on  
the display for about five seconds, then  
the previous display reappears.  
Bass  
If you need to cancel the sleep timer, press the [Sleep]  
button repeatedly until the SLEEP indicator disappears.  
You can boost or cut low-frequency sounds output by the  
front speakers from –10 dB to +10 dB in 1 dB steps.  
To check the time remaining until the AV controller sleeps,  
Treble  
press the [Sleep] button. Note that if you press the [Sleep  
button while the sleep time is being displayed, you’ll  
shorten the sleep time by 10 minutes.  
]
You can boost or cut high-frequency sounds output by  
the front speakers from –10 dB to +10 dB in 1 dB steps.  
Notes:  
• This setting is not available when the multichannel  
Analog input is selected.  
• The tone control settings do not apply to the Direct, or  
THX listening modes.  
Using Headphones  
For private listening, you can connect a pair of stereo  
headphones (1/4-inch phone plug) to the AV controller’s  
Phones jack.  
Displaying Source Information  
You can display various information about the current  
input source as follows.  
Remote  
controller  
Press the [Display] button  
repeatedly to cycle through the  
available information.  
Display  
AV controller  
Notes:  
• Always turn down the volume before connecting your  
headphones.  
• While the headphones plug is inserted in the Phones  
jack, the speakers are turned off and the Headphone  
indicator lights up.  
The following information can typically be displayed:  
Input source  
• When you connect a pair of headphones, the listening  
mode is set to Stereo, unless it’s already set to Stereo,  
Mono, or Direct.  
Listening  
mode  
• Only the Stereo, Direct, and Mono listening modes  
can be used with headphones (the listening modes  
available also depend on the currently selected input  
source).  
• When the multichannel input is used, only the front  
left and right audio can be heard in the headphones.  
Signal format*  
Sampling  
frequency  
*
If the input signal is analog, no format information is displayed.  
If the input signal is PCM, the sampling frequency is displayed.  
If the input signal is digital but not PCM, the signal format and  
the number of channels is displayed. For some digital input sig-  
nals, including multichannel PCM, the signal format, number of  
channels, and sampling frequency is displayed.  
Information is displayed for about three seconds, then the previ-  
ously displayed information reappears.  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Listening to the Radio  
Manual Tuning Mode  
Listening to AM/FM Stations  
Press the [Tuning Mode] button  
so that the AUTO indicator disap-  
pears from the display.  
1
2
Tuning Mode  
Tuning  
Press and hold the Tuning Up or  
Down [q]/[w] button.  
The frequency stops changing when  
you release the button.  
Press the button repeatedly to change  
the frequency one step at a time.  
Tuner  
With the built-in tuner, you can enjoy AM and FM radio  
stations and store your favorite stations as presets for  
easy selection.  
The North American model changes FM frequency in  
0.2 MHz steps, 10 kHz steps for AM. For other models  
it’s 0.05 MHz steps for FM and 9 kHz steps for AM.  
In Manual Tuning mode, FM stations will be in mono.  
Use the [Tuner] input selector  
button to select AM or FM.  
In this example, FM has been selected.  
Tuning into Weak FM Stereo Stations  
If the signal from a stereo FM station is weak, it may be  
impossible to get good reception. In this case, switch to  
Manual Tuning mode and listen to the station in mono.  
Band  
Frequency  
(Actual display depends on country.)  
Tuning into AM/FM Radio Stations  
Auto Tuning Mode  
Press the [Tuning Mode] button  
so that the AUTO indicator  
appears on the display.  
1
Press the Tuning Up or Down  
2
[q]/[w] button.  
Searching stops when a station is  
found.  
When tuned into a station, the TUNED indicator  
appears. When tuned into a stereo FM station, the FM  
STEREO indicator also appears. (The FM STEREO  
indicator will not appear on models that have  
HD Radio reception.)  
TUNED  
AUTO  
FM STEREO  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Listening to the Radio—Continued  
Tuning into Stations by Frequency  
You can tune into AM and FM stations directly by enter-  
ing the appropriate frequency.  
Displaying AM/FM Radio Information  
Display  
On  
Standby  
TV  
Input  
DVD  
1
VCR  
/
DVR  
CBL/SAT  
Number  
buttons  
2
AUX 1  
5
3
+
TV CH  
-
AUX 2  
6
Game/TV  
4
Tape  
7
Tuner  
8
CD  
9
TV VOL  
Phono  
D.TUN  
+10  
-- --- 10  
/
Clear  
0
D.TUN  
11  
12  
Input Selector  
Macro  
Zone  
3
2
1
2
3
Remote Mode  
Press the [Display] button to dis-  
play the available information.  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
Zone  
CDR/MD  
TV  
Cable  
SAT  
Dock  
Receiver  
Tape/AMP  
Sleep  
Receiver  
Press the [Receiver] button, fol-  
lowed by the [D.TUN] button.  
The [Receiver] button flashes.  
Band  
Frequency  
Preset #  
1
2
Receiver  
D.TUN  
Clear  
Listening mode  
Note:  
(Actual display depends on country.)  
When you select a preset with a custom name (see  
page 118), its name is displayed instead of the band and  
frequency.  
Within 8 seconds, use the num-  
ber buttons to enter the fre-  
quency of the radio station.  
For example, to tune to 87.5 (FM),  
press 8, 7, 5.  
DVD  
VCR/  
DVR  
CBL/SAT  
1
Game  
4
2
AUX 1  
5
3
AUX 2  
6
/
TV  
Tape  
7
CD  
9
Tuner  
8
Phono  
+10  
0
Note:  
While the [Receiver] button is flashing,  
you cannot select another input source  
with the remote controller.  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Listening to the Radio—Continued  
Selecting Presets  
Presetting AM, FM, XM, and SIRIUS  
Stations  
Preset  
2, 4  
3
TV  
Cable  
SAT  
T
Sleep  
Dimmer  
You can store a combination of up to 40 of your favorite  
AM and FM radio stations.  
+
CH  
CH +/–  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
Album  
-
Tune into the AM, FM, XM, or SIR-  
IUS station you want to store as a  
preset.  
1
Prev  
CH  
Muting  
Press the [Memory] button.  
The preset number flashes.  
2
To select a preset, use the Preset  
[e]/[r] buttons or the remote  
controller’s CH [+/–] button.  
+
CH  
While the preset number is flash-  
Disc  
Album  
3
ing (about 8 seconds), use the  
Preset [e]/[r] buttons to select a  
preset from 1 through 40.  
-
Deleting Presets  
Press the [Memory] button again  
4
to store the station.  
The station is stored and the preset  
number stops flashing.  
2
Repeat this procedure for all of your  
favorite stations.  
Note:  
You can name your radio presets for easy identification  
(see page 118).  
Select the preset that you want to  
delete.  
See the previous section.  
1
2
While holding down the [Mem-  
ory] button, press the [Tuning  
Mode] button.  
The preset is deleted and its number  
disappears from the display.  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Listening to the Radio—Continued  
TV CH  
AUX 1  
AUX 2  
m
/V  
-
Listening to HD Radio™ Stations  
(North American model only)  
Tape  
7
Tu
8
TV VOL  
Phono  
D.TUN  
+10  
-- --- 10  
/
Clear  
0
11  
12  
HD Radio technology brings digital radio to conven-  
tional analog AM and FM radio stations, with improved  
sound quality, better reception, and new data services.  
HD Radio technology provides CD-quality sound for  
FM stations and FM-quality sound for AM stations. In  
addition, FM HD Radio stations can transmit multiple  
programs on the same frequency by using multicast  
channels. Text data display incudes station name, song  
title, artist name, and so on.  
Input Selector  
Macro  
Zone  
3
2
1
2
3
Remote Mode  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
Zone  
CDR/MD  
TV  
Cable  
SAT  
Dock  
Receiver  
Tape/AMP  
Sleep  
Dimmer  
,
Enter  
+
CH  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
Album  
-
Prev  
CH  
For more information about HD Radio technology, visit:  
www.ibiquity.com  
Display  
Display  
Muting  
www.hdradio.com  
Playlist  
Rec  
Random  
Listening Mode  
Surround  
Stereo  
Repeat  
Audio  
Direct  
Subtitle  
THX  
Play Mode  
All ST  
HD Radio stations broadcast on the same AM and FM  
frequencies they’ve always used, and you can receive  
them by tuning into your favorite station as normal (see  
page 67). You can store them as presets just like AM and  
FM stations (see page 69).  
Test Tone  
CH Sel  
Level  
-
Level+  
Open/Close Video Off  
Audio Sel  
L
Night  
DVD  
Re-EQ  
HDD  
VCR  
Audio Sel  
RC-691M  
If the current AM or FM station supports HD Radio tech-  
nology, the HD indicator lights up.  
Audio Selector  
While a digital HD Radio transmission is being received,  
the DIGITAL indicator lights up. While an analog HD  
Radio transmission is being received, the ANALOG  
indicator lights up.  
Station name  
HD indicator  
Display Enter  
Song title  
Artist name  
HD Radio channel number  
• If the current AM or FM station supports HD Radio  
technology, the station’s name will be displayed  
instead of the band and frequency.  
• When music data is received, song title and artist  
name information is displayed.  
• If the current HD Radio station supports multicast  
channels, the name of the currently selected multicast  
channel will be displayed.  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Listening to the Radio—Continued  
Note:  
Selecting Multicast Channels  
Multicast channels 2 through 8 only carry a digital sig-  
nal, so to select an audio format, you must select multi-  
cast channel #1 first.  
FM HD Radio stations can transmit multiple programs  
on the same frequency by using what are called multicast  
channels. If the current HD Radio station is broadcasting  
multicast channels, the SPS (secondary program ser-  
vices) indicator lights up.  
Displaying HD Radio Information  
Press the [Display] button repeatedly to cycle through  
the available information.  
Press [Enter].  
The SPS indicator flashes.  
1
Enter  
Frequency  
Use the Up and Down Arrow  
2
Station information  
[q]/[w] buttons to select a multi-  
cast channel.  
Enter  
If you select a multicast channel that is  
not currently broadcasting, a plus [+]  
symbol will appear, indicating that the  
channel has been reserved. When  
Artist information  
broadcasting commences, that channel  
Enter  
will be selected automatically.  
Song title information  
Reserved channel indication  
HD Radio channel number  
Within 5 seconds, press [Enter] to set  
the multicast channel.  
Note:  
Multicast channels are not available on  
AM.  
Selecting the Audio Format (Blend Mode)  
HD Radio stations transmit both analog and digital ver-  
sions of their programs and you can choose which one  
you want to listen to.  
Remote  
controller  
Use the [Audio Sel] button to  
select “Auto” or “Analog”.  
Audio Sel  
AV controller  
Auto: Select to use the digital sig-  
nal.  
Analog: Select to use the analog sig-  
nal.  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Listening to the Radio—Continued  
RDS Program Types (PTY)  
Using RDS  
Type  
Display  
RDS only works in areas where RDS broadcasts are  
available. When tuned to an RDS station, the RDS indi-  
cator appears.  
None  
NONE  
News reports  
Current affairs  
Information  
Sport  
NEWS  
AFFAIRS  
INFO  
RDS indicator  
SPORT  
Education  
EDUCATE  
DRAMA  
Drama  
Culture  
CULTURE  
SCIENCE  
VARIED  
Science and technology  
Varied  
What is RDS?  
RDS stands for Radio Data System and is a method of  
transmitting data in FM radio signals. It was developed  
by the European Broadcasting Union (EBU) and is avail-  
able in most European countries. RDS is approved by the  
National Radio Systems Committee (NRSC) and is  
available in North America.  
Many FM stations use it these days. In addition to dis-  
playing text information, RDS can also help you find  
radio stations by type (e.g., news, sport, rock, etc.).  
The AV controller supports four types of RDS informa-  
tion:  
Pop music  
Rock music  
Middle of the road music  
Light classics  
Serious classics  
Other music  
Weather  
POP M  
ROCK M  
EASY M  
LIGHT M  
CLASSICS  
OTHER M  
WEATHER  
FINANCE  
CHILDREN  
SOCIAL  
RELIGION  
PHONE IN  
TRAVEL  
LEISURE  
JAZZ  
Finance  
Children’s programmes  
Social affairs  
Religion  
PS (Program Service)  
When tuned to an RDS station that’s broadcasting PS  
information, the station’s name will be displayed. Press-  
ing the [Display] button will display the frequency for 3  
seconds.  
Phone in  
Travel  
Leisure  
RT (Radio Text)  
Jazz music  
Country music  
National music  
Oldies music  
Folk music  
Documentary  
Alarm test  
When tuned to an RDS station that’s broadcasting text  
information, the text will be shown on the display (see  
page 73).  
COUNTRY  
NATION M  
OLDIES  
FOLK M  
DOCUMENT  
TEST  
PTY (Program Type)  
This allows you to search RDS radio stations by type  
(see page 73).  
TP (Traffic Program)  
This allows you to search for RDS radio stations that  
broadcast traffic information (see page 73).  
Alarm  
ALARM  
Notes:  
• In some cases, the characters displayed on the AV con-  
troller may not be identical to those broadcast by the  
radio station. Also, unexpected characters may be dis-  
played when unsupported characters are received.  
This is not a malfunction.  
• If the signal from an RDS station is weak, RDS data  
may be displayed intermittently or not at all.  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Listening to the Radio—Continued  
Displaying Radio Text (RT)  
Use the Preset [e]/[r] buttons to  
select the type of program you  
want.  
3
RT/PTY/TP  
See the table on page 72.  
To start the search, press [Enter].  
The AV controller searches until it finds  
a station of the type you specified, at  
which point it stops briefly before con-  
tinuing with the search.  
4
5
When tuned to an RDS station that’s broadcasting text  
information, the text can be displayed.  
When a station you want to listen  
to is found, press [Enter].  
If no stations are found, the message  
“Not Found” appears.  
Press the [RT/PTY/TP] button  
once.  
The RT information scrolls across the  
display.  
Listening to Traffic News (TP)  
Notes:  
• The message “Waiting” may appear while the AV con-  
troller waits for the RT information.  
• If the message “No Text Data” appears on the display,  
no RT information is available.  
2
Finding Stations by Type (PTY)  
2
3
1
3
You can search for stations that broadcast traffic news.  
Use the [Tuner] input selector  
button to select FM.  
1
1
4, 5  
You can search for radio stations by type.  
Press the [RT/PTY/TP] button  
three times.  
2
Use the [Tuner] input selector  
button to select FM.  
1
2
If the current radio station is broadcast-  
ing TP (Traffic Program), “[TP]” will  
appear on the display and traffic news  
will be heard as and when it’s broad-  
cast. If “TP” without square brackets  
appears, this means that the station is  
not broadcasting TP.  
Press the [RT/PTY/TP] button  
twice.  
The current program type appears on  
the display.  
To locate a station that is broad-  
3
casting TP, press [Enter].  
The AV controller searches until it finds  
a station that’s broadcasting TP.  
If no stations are found, the message  
“Not Found” appears.  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Listening to the Radio—Continued  
Activate your XM Satellite Radio service in the U.S.  
online at http://activate.xmradio.com or call 1-800-  
XMRADIO (1-800-967- 2346). Activate your XM Sat-  
ellite Radio service in Canada online at https://acti-  
vate.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-GET-XMSR (1-877-438-  
9677). You will need a major credit card. XM will send  
a signal from the satellites to activate the full channel  
lineup. Activation normally takes 10-15 minutes, but  
during peak busy periods you may need to keep your  
XM Ready audio system on for up to an hour. When you  
can access the full lineup on your XM Ready audio sys-  
tem you are done.  
Listening to XM Satellite Radio®  
(North American Model Only)  
About XM Radio  
XM is North America’s number one satellite radio com-  
pany, offering an extraordinary variety of commercial-  
free music, plus the best in premier sports, news, talk  
radio, comedy, children’s and entertainment program-  
ming, broadcast in superior digital audio quality coast to  
coast. For more information, or to subscribe, U.S. cus-  
tomers visit xmradio.com or call XM Listener Care at  
1-800-XMRADIO (1-800-967-2346); Canadian cus-  
tomers visit xmradio.ca or call XM Listener Care at  
1-877-GETXMSR (1-877-438-9677).  
Connecting the XM Mini-Tuner and Home  
Dock  
To receive XM Satellite Radio, you need an XM Mini-  
Tuner and Home Dock, which includes a home antenna.  
These are sold separately. For connection information,  
refer to the instruction manual supplied with the XM  
Mini-Tuner and Home Dock.  
®
XM Ready Legal  
XM monthly service subscription sold separately. XM  
Mini-Tuner and Home Dock required (each sold sepa-  
rately) to receive XM service. It is prohibited to copy,  
decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer, hack, manip-  
ulate or otherwise make available any technology or  
software incorporated in receivers compatible with the  
XM satellite Radio System. Installation costs and other  
fees and taxes, including a one-time activation fee may  
apply. All fees and programming subject to change.  
Channels with frequent explicit language are indicated  
with an XL. Channel blocking is available for XM radio  
receivers by calling 1-800-XMRADIO (U.S. residents)  
and 1-877-GETXMSR (Canadian residents). Only avail-  
able in the 48 contiguous United States and Canada.  
©2007 XM Satellite Radio Inc. All rights reserved.  
XM Mini-Tuner jack  
®
XM Ready Subscription  
Once you have installed the XM Mini-Tuner Home  
Dock, inserted the XM Mini-Tuner, connected the XM  
Mini-Tuner Home Dock to your XM Ready® audio sys-  
tem, and installed the antenna, you are ready to subscribe  
and begin receiving XM programming. There are three  
places to find your eight character XM Radio ID: On the  
XM Mini-Tuner, on the XM Mini-Tuner package, and on  
XM Channel 0. Record the Radio ID below for reference.  
Note:  
The XM Radio ID does not use the letters “I”, “O”, “S”  
or “F”.  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Listening to the Radio—Continued  
/
M
Use the Left and Right [e]/[r]  
buttons to select “XM”.  
If there are 2 items on the Tuner  
screen, use Up and Down [q]/[w]  
buttons to select “Satellite  
Radio”.  
2
1
2
4
Remote Mode  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
Zone  
CDR/MD  
TV  
Cable  
SAT  
Dock  
Receiver  
Tape/AMP  
Sleep  
Receiver  
Enter  
Enter  
Dimmer  
+
CH  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
Album  
Pressing the Left and Right [e]/[r]  
buttons cycles through the following  
options: None XM SIRIUS →  
XM/SIRIUS  
-
Prev  
CH  
Setup  
Display  
Muting  
None: Select if you’re not using  
satellite radio.  
XM: Select to use XM Satellite  
Radio.  
SIRIUS: Select to use SIRIUS Satel-  
lite Radio.  
Setting the Satellite Radio Mode  
Before you can listen to XM Satellite Radio, you must  
set the Satellite Radio mode to XM.  
XM/SIRIUS:Select to use XM Satel-  
lite Radio and SIRIUS Sat-  
ellite Radio.  
Press the [Receiver] Remote  
Mode button, followed by the  
[Setup] button.  
1
Receiver  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
When you’ve finished, press the  
[Setup] button.  
5
Setup closes.  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
2
Tuning  
tons to select “7. Hardware  
Setup”, and then press [Enter].  
The “Hardware Setup” menu appears.  
Enter  
7. Hardware Setup  
1. Remote Control  
2. Zone2/Zone3  
3. Tuner  
4. Analog Multich  
Enter  
5. HDMI  
6. Network  
Tuner  
ENTER  
RETURN  
SETUP  
EXIT  
MOVE  
ENTER  
RETURN  
Selecting XM Satellite Radio  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
tons to select “3. Tuner”, and  
then press [Enter].  
3
AV controller  
On the AV controller, press the  
[Tuner] Input Selector button  
repeatedly to select XM.  
Enter  
The “Tuner” screen appears.  
Remote  
controller  
7–3. Tuner  
Satellite Radio  
On the remote controller, press  
the [Receiver] Remote Mode but-  
ton, and then press the [Tuner]  
Input Selector button repeatedly  
to select XM.  
None  
Receiver  
Enter  
Tuner  
RETURN  
SETUP  
EXIT  
VALUE  
RETURN  
If “CHECK XM TUNER” appears on  
the display, make sure the XM Mini-  
Tuner is connected properly.  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Listening to the Radio—Continued  
Signing Up for XM Satellite Radio  
Selecting XM Radio Channels  
Once you have installed the XM Mini-Tuner and Home  
Dock, you are ready to subscribe to XM Satellite Radio.  
You’ll need a major credit card and your XM Radio ID.  
There are three places you can find your 8-character XM  
Radio ID:  
1. On the XM Mini-Tuner  
2. On the XM Mini-Tuner packaging  
3. On XM Channel 0, as explained below  
There are three ways to select XM radio channels:  
1. Channel Search mode: select any channel.  
2. Category Search mode: select channels by category.  
3. Direct tuning: enter channel number.  
Note:  
You can’t select Channel Search mode or Category  
Search mode while the Tuning Arrow  
are flashing, as tuning is in progress.  
indicators  
Use the Tuning Up and Down  
1
[q]/[w] buttons to select RADIO  
AV controller  
On  
Standby  
ID.  
TV  
Input  
Your XM Radio ID number is dis-  
played. Write it below for reference.  
DVD  
1
VCR  
/
DVR  
CBL/SAT  
Number  
buttons  
2
AUX 1  
5
3
+
TV CH  
-
AUX 2  
6
Game/TV  
4
Tape  
7
Tuner  
8
CD  
9
ID  
TV VOL  
Phono  
D.TUN  
+10  
-- --- 10  
/
Clear  
0
11  
12  
D.TUN  
Input Selector  
Macro  
To sign up, go to:  
Or call: 1-800-967-2346  
Zone  
3
2
1
2
3
2
Remote Mode  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
Zone  
CDR/MD  
TV  
Cable  
SAT  
Dock  
Receiver  
Tape/AMP  
Sleep  
Receiver  
Enter  
For XM Canada, go to:  
Or call: 1-877-438-9677  
Dimmer  
+
CH  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
Album  
-
Notes:  
Prev  
CH  
• RADIO ID cannot be selected in Category Search  
mode. You must select Channel Search mode (see  
page 76).  
y  
Muting  
• The following letters are not used in XM Satellite  
Radio IDs: I, O, S, F.  
Surround  
Stereo  
• XM Satellite Radio will transmit a special signal to  
your AV controller to activate the full channel lineup.  
Activation normally takes between 10 and 15 minutes,  
but during busy peak periods, you may need to leave  
the AV controller turned on for up to an hour.  
Channel Search Mode  
Press the [Receiver] Remote  
Mode button, and then press the  
[Enter] button repeatedly to  
select Channel Search mode.  
1
Receiver  
Enter  
This procedure can also be performed  
on the AV controller by using its  
[Tuner] button, and [Tuning Mode] but-  
ton.  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
2
tons to select a channel.  
Channel number  
Enter  
Channel name  
You can also use the Left and Right  
[e]/[r] buttons to select a category.  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Listening to the Radio—Continued  
Category Search Mode  
Selecting Channels on the AV controller:  
Press the [Receiver] Remote  
Mode button, and then press the  
[Enter] button repeatedly to  
select Category Search mode.  
1
Press the [Tuning Mode] button  
1
Remote  
controller  
repeatedly to select Channel  
Search mode or Category Search  
mode.  
AV controller  
Receiver  
Press [Enter] repeatedly to select  
a category.  
Enter  
This procedure can also be performed  
2
on the AV controller by using its  
[Tuner] button, and [Tuning Mode] but-  
ton.  
AV controller  
Use the Left and Right [e]/[r]  
2
Use the Tuning Up and Down  
[q]/[w] buttons to select a chan-  
nel.  
In Channel Search mode, you can  
select any channel.  
3
buttons to select a category, and  
AV controller  
use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
Enter  
tons to select a channel in that  
category.  
In Category Search mode, you can only  
select channels from the currently  
selected category.  
Direct Tuning  
You can select an XM radio channel directly by entering  
its number.  
Selecting the Previous Channel:  
To listen to the previously  
selected XM channel, press the  
[Return] button.  
AV controller  
Press the [Receiver] Remote  
Mode button, followed by the  
[D.TUN] button.  
1
Remote  
controller  
The [Receiver] button flashes.  
Receiver  
Remote  
controller  
D.TUN  
Clear  
Within 8 seconds, use the num-  
ber buttons to enter the channel  
number.  
For example, to select channel #20,  
press 0, 2, 0, or 2, 0, [Enter].  
2
DVD  
1
VCR  
/
DVR  
CBL/SAT  
2
AUX 1  
5
3
AUX 2  
6
Game/TV  
4
Tape  
7
Tuner  
8
CD  
9
D.TUN  
Clear  
0
12  
Note:  
While the [Receiver] button is flashing,  
you cannot select another input source  
with the remote controller.  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Listening to the Radio—Continued  
-- ---  
/
Displaying XM Radio Information  
2
1
2
Remote Mode  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
Zone  
CDR/MD  
AV controller  
Press the [Display] button  
repeatedly to cycle through the  
available information.  
TV  
Cable  
SAT  
Dock  
Receiver  
Tape/AMP  
Sleep  
Receiver  
Enter  
Dimmer  
+
CH  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
Album  
Remote  
controller  
-
Setup  
Prev  
CH  
Display  
Muting  
Display  
Playlist  
Rec  
Random  
Surround  
The following information can be displayed:  
Positioning the XM Mini-Tuner System  
Channel name  
You can check the signal strength of the XM radio signal  
and adjust the position of the XM Mini-Tuner system  
accordingly.  
Channel number & preset number  
Category  
Press the [Receiver] Remote  
Mode button, followed by the  
[Setup] button.  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
Artist  
1
Receiver  
Song title  
Listening mode  
Notes:  
• If the category, artist, or song title is not available,  
“- - -” will be displayed instead.  
• The listening mode is not displayed when Zone 2 or  
Zone 3 is selected.  
Use the Up and Down [  
tons to select “4. Source Setup”,  
and then press [Enter].  
q
]/[ ] but-  
w
2
Enter  
The “Source Setup” menu appears.  
4. Source Setup  
DVD  
1. IntelliVolume  
2. A/V Sync  
3. Name Edit  
Enter  
4. Picture Adjust  
5. Satellite Radio  
6. SIRIUS Parental Lock  
ENTER  
RETURN  
SETUP  
EXIT  
MOVE  
ENTER  
RETURN  
Note:  
If the “Satellite Radio” mode is set to  
“None” (see page 75), the “5. Satellite  
Radio” item is not available.  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Listening to the Radio—Continued  
UPDATING  
XM is updating your Mini-Tuner with the latest  
encryption code. Wait a few seconds until the update  
is done. Alternatively, you may be attempting to tune  
to a channel that is blocked or that you cannot  
receive with your subscription package. To receive  
that channel, contact XM Satellite Radio.  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
3
tons to select “5. Satellite  
Radio”, and then press [Enter].  
The “Satellite Radio” screen appears.  
The name of the currently selected  
input selector is displayed in a box.  
Enter  
NO SIGNAL  
The XM Mini-Tuner cannot receive the satellite sig-  
nal. Check the XM antenna for obstructions to the  
southern sky. Check the antenna positioning with the  
Antenna Aiming function (see page 78).  
Enter  
LOADING  
The AV controller is tuning or decoding audio or text  
data. Please wait. If this occurs often, check the XM  
antenna position with the Antenna Aiming function  
(see page 78).  
Position the XM Mini-Tuner  
4
Antenna so that as many bars as  
possible (up to 3) appear on the  
XM Satellite signal strength  
meter.  
OFF AIR  
The XM channel you selected is not currently broad-  
casting. Select another channel.  
The best signal is achieved when the  
antenna is pointing to the southern sky  
through an unobstructed window.  
UPGRADE XM TUNER  
The connected XM CNP-1000 is incompatible. The  
AV controller features advanced technology that is  
designed for use with the XM Mini-Tuner. Contact  
XM Listener Care and ask about upgrading your XM  
CNP-1000 to an XM Mini-Tuner. Have the AV con-  
troller’s model name and CNP-1000 XM ID number  
ready beforehand, and explain that your AV control-  
ler is displaying the message “Upgrade XM Tuner”.  
If you already have an XM Mini-Tuner connected  
and you see this message, turn off the AV controller,  
make sure the XM Mini-Tuner is properly seated in  
the Mini-Tuner Dock, and then turn the AV control-  
ler back on again. If the message reappears, contact  
XM Listener Care and explain the issue that you’re  
experiencing and the corrective actions you’ve tried.  
4–5. Satellite Radio  
TUNER  
XM Antenna Aiming  
Satellite  
Terrestrial  
SIRIUS Antenna Aiming  
Satellite  
Terrestrial  
siriusID: [  
MOVE  
]
RETURN  
SETUP  
RETURN  
EXIT  
If you cannot receive a satellite signal,  
position the XM Mini-Tuner System so  
that as many bars as possible (up to 3)  
appear on the XM Terrestrial signal  
strength meter.  
CHECK XM TUNER  
Notes:  
The AV controller is having difficulty communicat-  
ing with the XM Mini-Tuner module. Make sure the  
XM Mini-Tuner is properly seated in the Mini-Tuner  
Dock. And make sure the Mini-Tuner Dock cable is  
properly connected to the AV controller and is not  
damaged. If the issue persists, contact XM Listener  
Care. Have the AV controller’s model name ready  
beforehand, and explain the issue that you’re experi-  
encing and the corrective actions you’ve tried.  
• So long as the signal strength is good, you can enjoy  
XM Radio by using either satellite or terrestrial recep-  
tion.  
• Terrestrial signals are only available in certain areas.  
• The XM information is only displayed when the “Sat-  
ellite Radio” mode is set to “XM” or “XM/SIRIUS”  
(see page 75).  
Unavailable Channel  
• If you’re using both XM Satellite Radio and SIRIUS  
Satellite Radio and the “Satellite Radio” mode is set to  
“XM/SIRIUS” (see page 75), signal strength meters  
for both systems appear on the same screen.  
You may be attempting to select a channel that is  
unavailable or has changed to a different channel  
number. Check xmradio.com for the latest channel  
listing.  
XM Radio Messages  
The following messages may appear while using XM  
Satellite radio.  
XM Listener Care phone number:  
CHECK ANTENNA  
US:  
1-800-967-2346  
The XM antenna is not properly connected to the  
Mini-Tuner Dock. Check the connection. Check the  
antenna cable for damage.  
Canada: 1-877-438-9677  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Listening to the Radio—Continued  
Setting Up the SiriusConnect™ Home  
Tuner  
Listening to SIRIUS Satellite Radio®  
(North American Models Only)  
The optional SiriusConnect Home tuner kit includes  
everything for easy home installation, including the Sir-  
iusConnect receiver, indoor/outdoor antenna with 21-  
foot cable, 8-pin mini DIN connector cable, and an AC  
power adapter. See the SiriusConnect Home tuner’s  
instructions for more information.  
Use the 8-pin mini DIN connector cable to connect the  
SiriusConnect receiver to the SIRIUS jack on the rear of  
the AV controller.  
Important SIRIUS Satellite Radio Information  
SIRIUS is available in the US for subscribers with  
addresses in the continental US and is available in  
Canada for subscribers with a Canadian address. To  
Get SIRIUS Satellite Radio a subscription and  
compatible tuner and antenna are required and sold  
separately. Visit sirius.com for the most complete  
and up-to-date channel lineup and information.  
“SIRIUS” and the SIRIUS dog logo and related  
marks are trademarks of SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc.  
Indoor/outdoor antenna  
with 21-foot cable  
Note:  
SiriusConnect  
AC power  
receiver  
Hardware and required basic monthly subscription sold  
separately. Installation costs and other fees and taxes,  
including a one-time activation fee may apply. Subscrip-  
tion fee is consumer only. All fees and programming  
subject to change.  
8-pin mini DIN  
connector cable  
What is SIRIUS Satellite Radio?  
Simply The Best Radio on Radio with all your favor-  
SIRIUS  
jack  
TM  
ite entertainment including 100% commercial-free  
music, plus superior sports coverage, uncensored talk  
and comedy, world-class entertainment, news, weather  
and more for your car, home or office. For more informa-  
tion visit sirius.com or siriuscanada.ca.  
A warning against reverse engineering:  
It is prohibited to copy, decompile, disassemble, reverse  
engineer, or manipulate any technology incorporated in  
receivers compatible with the SIRIUS Satellite Radio  
system.  
AV controller  
To use the included antenna indoors, you must place it at  
a north-, west-, or east-facing window, depending on  
where you live. If this isn’t possible, you’ll need to  
install it outside, away from any overhead obstructions.  
“SIRIUS” and the SIRIUS dog  
logo are registered trademarks of  
SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc.  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Listening to the Radio—Continued  
Positioning the Antenna  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
tons to select “7. Hardware  
Setup”, and then press [Enter].  
2
3
4
For a consistent satellite signal, the antenna must be posi-  
tioned correctly. Use the following map to determine which  
area you are in and position the antenna accordingly.  
Enter  
The “Hardware Setup” menu appears.  
SKY  
7. Hardware Setup  
1. Remote Control  
2. Zone2/Zone3  
3. Tuner  
4. Analog Multich  
5. HDMI  
6. Network  
NORTH  
Enter  
1
4
5
WEST  
EAST  
ENTER  
RETURN  
SETUP  
EXIT  
MOVE  
ENTER  
RETURN  
3
2
HORIZON  
SOUTH  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
tons to select “3. Tuner”, and  
then press [Enter].  
Area 1: Point the antenna toward the sky in the east north-  
east, or southeast, either through a window or outside.  
Area 2: Point the antenna toward the sky in the north or  
northeast, either through a window or outside.  
Area 3: Point the antenna toward the sky in the north or  
northwest, either through a window or outside.  
Area 4: Point the antenna toward the sky in the west north-  
west, or southwest, either through a window or outside.  
Area 5: Put the antenna outside and point it straight up.  
The antenna cannot be used indoors.  
,
Enter  
The “Tuner” screen appears.  
7–3. Tuner  
Satellite Radio  
None  
,
Enter  
RETURN  
SETUP  
EXIT  
VALUE  
RETURN  
On  
Standby  
Input  
DVD  
1
VCR  
/
DVR  
CBL/SAT  
Use the Left and Right [e]/[r]  
buttons to select “SIRIUS”.  
If there are 2 items on the Tuner  
screen, use Up and Down [q]/[w]  
buttons to select “Satellite  
Radio”.  
Pressing the Left and Right [e]/[r]  
buttons cycles through the following  
options: None XM SIRIUS →  
XM/SIRIUS  
+
TV CH  
-
2
AUX 1  
5
3
AUX 2  
6
Game/TV  
4
Tape  
7
Tuner  
8
CD  
9
Enter  
TV VOL  
Phono  
D.TUN  
Tuner  
+10  
-- --- 10  
/
Clear  
0
11  
12  
Input Selector  
Macro  
Zone  
3
2
1
2
3
Remote Mode  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
Zone  
CDR/MD  
TV  
Cable  
SAT  
Dock  
Receiver  
Tape/AMP  
Sleep  
Receiver  
Enter  
Dimmer  
Enter  
+
None: Select if you’re not using  
satellite radio.  
CH  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
Album  
-
XM: Select to use XM Satellite  
Radio.  
Prev  
CH  
Setup  
Display  
Muting  
SIRIUS: Select to use SIRIUS Satel-  
lite Radio.  
XM/SIRIUS:Select to use XM Satel-  
lite Radio and SIRIUS Sat-  
ellite Radio.  
Setting the Satellite Radio Mode  
Before you can listen to SIRIUS Satellite Radio, you  
must set the Satellite Radio mode to SIRIUS.  
When you’ve finished, press the  
[Setup] button.  
Setup closes.  
5
Press the [Receiver] Remote  
Mode button, followed by the  
[Setup] button.  
1
Receiver  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Listening to the Radio—Continued  
Selecting SIRIUS Satellite Radio Channels  
Tuning  
There are three ways to select SIRIUS Satellite Radio  
channels:  
1. Channel Search mode: select any channel.  
2. Category Search mode: select channels by category.  
3. Direct tuning: enter channel number.  
On  
Standby  
TV  
Input  
DVD  
1
VCR  
/
DVR  
CBL/SAT  
Number  
buttons  
Tuner  
2
AUX 1  
5
3
+
TV CH  
-
AUX 2  
6
Game/TV  
4
Tape  
7
Tuner  
8
CD  
9
Selecting SIRIUS Satellite Radio  
TV VOL  
Phono  
D.TUN  
+10  
-- --- 10  
/
Clear  
0
11  
12  
D.TUN  
Input Selector  
On the AV controller, press the  
[Tuner] Input Selector button  
repeatedly to select SIRIUS.  
AV controller  
Macro  
Zone  
3
2
1
2
3
Remote Mode  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
Zone  
CDR/MD  
TV  
Cable  
SAT  
Dock  
Receiver  
Tape/AMP  
Sleep  
Receiver  
Enter  
Dimmer  
On the remote controller, press  
the [Receiver] Remote Mode but-  
ton, and then press the [Tuner]  
Remote  
controller  
+
CH  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
Album  
Input Selector button repeatedly  
to select SIRIUS.  
-
Receiver  
Prev  
CH  
Muting  
Tuner  
If “CHECK SR TUNER” appears on  
the display, make sure the SiriusCon-  
nect receiver is connected properly. If  
“ANTENNA ERROR” appears, make  
sure the antenna is connected properly.  
Channel Search Mode  
Press the [Receiver] Remote  
Mode button, and then press the  
[Enter] button repeatedly to  
select Channel Search mode.  
1
Receiver  
Enter  
Signing Up for SIRIUS Satellite Radio  
Before you can use SIRIUS Satellite Radio, you must  
first sign up for an account. You’ll need a major credit  
card and your SIRIUS Satellite Radio ID, which you can  
get from the AV controller, as explained below, or from  
the SiriusConnect Home tuner package.  
This procedure can also be performed  
on the AV controller by using its  
[Tuner] button, and [Tuning Mode] but-  
ton.  
Use the Tuning Up and Down  
1
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
2
[q]/[w] buttons to select  
tons to select a channel.  
AV controller  
channel 0.  
Channel number  
Your SIRIUS Satellite Radio ID num-  
ber is displayed. Write it below.  
Enter  
ID  
Channel name  
You can also use the Left and Right  
[e]/[r] buttons to select a category.  
To sign up, go to:  
Or call: 1-888-539-SIRIUS (7474)  
2
Note:  
Your ID is also displayed on the Satellite Radio screen.  
See “Positioning the SiriusConnect Home Antenna” on  
page 87.  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Listening to the Radio—Continued  
Selecting Channels on the AV controller:  
Category Search Mode  
Press the [Receiver] Remote  
Mode button, and then press the  
[Enter] button repeatedly to  
select Category Search mode.  
Press the [Tuning Mode] button  
1
1
repeatedly to select Channel  
Search mode or Category Search  
mode.  
Remote  
controller  
AV controller  
Receiver  
Press [Enter] repeatedly to select  
a category.  
Enter  
2
This procedure can also be performed  
on the AV controller by using its  
[Tuner] button, and [Tuning Mode] but-  
ton.  
AV controller  
Use the Left and Right [e]/[r]  
buttons to select a category, and  
use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
tons to select a channel in that  
category.  
2
Use the Tuning Up and Down  
[q]/[w] buttons to select a chan-  
nel.  
In Channel Search mode, you can  
select any channel.  
3
AV controller  
Enter  
In Category Search mode, you can only  
select channels from the currently  
selected category.  
Direct Tuning  
You can select a SIRIUS Satellite Radio channel directly  
by entering its number.  
Selecting the Previous Channel:  
To listen to the previously  
AV controller  
Press the [Receiver] Remote  
Mode button, followed by the  
[D.TUN] button.  
The [Receiver] button flashes.  
selected SIRIUS Satellite Radio  
channel, press the [Return] but-  
ton.  
1
Remote  
controller  
Receiver  
Remote  
controller  
D.TUN  
Clear  
Within 8 seconds, use the num-  
ber buttons to enter the channel  
number.  
For example, to select channel #20,  
press 0, 2, 0, or 2, 0, [Enter].  
2
DVD  
VCR  
/
DVR  
CBL/SAT  
1
Game  
4
2
AUX 1  
5
3
AUX 2  
6
/TV  
Tape  
7
Tuner  
8
CD  
9
D.TUN  
Clear  
0
12  
Note:  
While the [Receiver] button is flashing,  
you cannot select another input source  
with the remote controller.  
Notes:  
• If you select an unavailable channel, “INVALID  
CHANNEL” appears on the display.  
• If you select a channel that you are not subscribed to,  
“CALL SIRIUS” appears on the display.  
• Channels that are locked must be unlocked before you  
can listen to them. See “Parental Lock” on page 84 for  
more information.  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Listening to the Radio—Continued  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
tons to select “6. SIRIUS Parental  
Lock”, and then press [Enter].  
The “SIRIUS Parental Lock” screen  
appears.  
3
4
2
1
2
Remote Mode  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
Zone  
Enter  
CDR/MD  
TV  
Cable  
SAT  
Dock  
Receiver  
Tape/AMP  
Sleep  
Receiver  
Enter  
Dimmer  
4–6. SIRIUS Parental Lock  
+
TUNER  
Enter Code  
CH  
Enter  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
Album  
-
Prev  
CH  
Setup  
Display  
Muting  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
ENTER  
RETURN  
SETUP  
EXIT  
MOVE  
INPUT  
RETURN  
Press the [D.TUN] button, and  
then use the number buttons to  
enter the 4-digit PIN number.  
Parental Lock  
D.TUN  
Clear  
With SIRIUS Parental Lock, you can lock out channels  
that you do not want to receive and use a 4-digit PIN  
number to prevent others from unlocking them.  
Or  
Press the [Receiver] Remote  
Mode button, followed by the  
[Setup] button.  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
DVD  
VCR  
/
DVR  
CBL/SAT  
1
1
Game  
4
2
AUX 1  
5
3
Use the Left and Right [e]/[r]  
buttons to select a number on the  
screen, and then press [Enter].  
Repeat this for each of the four  
digits in the PIN number.  
AUX 2  
6
/
TV  
Receiver  
Tape  
7
Tuner  
8
CD  
9
D.TUN  
Clear  
0
12  
If you’re entering the PIN number for  
the very first time, the PIN is stored,  
and the following screen appears.  
Use the Up and Down [  
tons to select “4. Source Setup”,  
and then press [Enter].  
q
]/[ ] but-  
w
2
4–6. SIRIUS Parental Lock  
or  
TUNER  
Edit Code  
Parental Lock  
Enter  
The “Source Setup” menu appears.  
Enter  
4. Source Setup  
DVD  
1. IntelliVolume  
ENTER  
RETURN  
SETUP  
EXIT  
ENTER  
RETURN  
2. A/V Sync  
3. Name Edit  
Enter  
4. Picture Adjust  
5. Satellite Radio  
6. SIRIUS Parental Lock  
If you’ve already set a PIN number, you  
must enter the correct PIN to get to this  
screen. If you enter the wrong PIN, the  
message “Wrong Code!” appears and  
you’ll have to enter the PIN again.  
Enter  
ENTER  
RETURN  
SETUP  
EXIT  
MOVE  
ENTER  
RETURN  
Note:  
If the “Satellite Radio” mode is set to  
“None” or “XM” (see page 81), the “6.  
SIRIUS Parental Lock” item is not  
available.  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
tons to select “Parental Lock”,  
and then press [Enter].  
5
Enter  
The “Parental Lock” screen appears.  
4–6. SIRIUS Parental Lock  
TUNER  
Edit Code  
New Code  
Confirm  
****  
**  
Enter  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
ENTER  
RETURN  
SETUP  
EXIT  
MOVE  
INPUT  
RETURN  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Listening to the Radio—Continued  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
tons to select “6. SIRIUS Parental  
Lock”, and then press [Enter].  
The “SIRIUS Parental Lock” screen  
appears.  
6
3
4
tons to select a channel, and use  
the Left and Right [e]/[r] but-  
Enter  
Enter  
tons to select Locked or  
Unlocked.  
The number, name, and status of the  
currently selected channel is displayed.  
4–6. SIRIUS Parental Lock  
TUNER  
Enter Code  
Enter  
When you’ve finished, press  
[Enter] to save your changes, or  
press [Return] to return to the  
previous screen without saving.  
When [Enter] is pressed, the confirma-  
tion message “Locked” or “Unlocked”  
appears.  
7
Enter  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
ENTER  
RETURN  
SETUP  
EXIT  
MOVE  
INPUT  
RETURN  
Press the [D.TUN] button, and  
then use the number buttons to  
enter the old 4-digit PIN number.  
Press the [Setup] button.  
Setup closes.  
8
D.TUN  
Clear  
Or  
DVD  
VCR/  
DVR  
CBL/SAT  
1
Game  
4
2
AUX 1  
5
3
Use the Left and Right [e]/[r]  
buttons to select a number on the  
screen, and then press [Enter].  
Repeat this for each of the four  
digits in the old PIN number.  
If you enter the correct PIN number, the  
following screen appears.  
AUX 2  
6
/TV  
Notes:  
Tape  
7
Tuner  
8
CD  
9
• While a channel is locked, it cannot be selected for  
listening.  
• To unlock a channel, you must enter the correct PIN  
number and change it to Unlocked in step 6.  
D.TUN  
Clear  
0
12  
Changing the PIN Number  
4–6. SIRIUS Parental Lock  
TUNER  
Edit Code  
Parental Lock  
Press the [Receiver] Remote  
Mode button, followed by the  
[Setup] button.  
1
or  
Receiver  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
Enter  
ENTER  
RETURN  
SETUP  
EXIT  
ENTER  
RETURN  
If you enter the wrong PIN number, the  
message “Wrong Code!” appears and  
you’ll have to enter the PIN again.  
Enter  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
2
tons to select “4. Source Setup”,  
and then press [Enter].  
Enter  
The “Source Setup” menu appears.  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
tons to select “Edit Code”, and  
then press [Enter].  
5
4. Source Setup  
DVD  
1. IntelliVolume  
2. A/V Sync  
3. Name Edit  
Enter  
4. Picture Adjust  
Enter  
The “New Code” screen appears.  
5. Satellite Radio  
6. SIRIUS Parental Lock  
4–6. SIRIUS Parental Lock  
TUNER  
Edit Code  
ENTER  
RETURN  
SETUP  
EXIT  
MOVE  
ENTER  
RETURN  
New Code  
Confirm  
Enter  
Note:  
If the “Satellite Radio” mode is set to  
“None” or “XM” (see page 81), the “6.  
SIRIUS Parental Lock” item is not  
available.  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
ENTER  
RETURN  
SETUP  
EXIT  
MOVE  
INPUT  
RETURN  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Listening to the Radio—Continued  
nput Selector  
2
1
2
Press the [D.TUN] button, and  
then use the number buttons to  
enter the new 4-digit PIN number.  
Remote Mode  
6
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
Zone  
CDR/MD  
D.TUN  
TV  
Cable  
SAT  
Dock  
Receiver  
Tape/AMP  
Sleep  
Receiver  
Enter  
Clear  
Dimmer  
Or  
+
CH  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
Album  
DVD  
1
VCR  
/
DVR  
CBL/SAT  
2
AUX 1  
5
3
-
Use the Left and Right [e]/[r]  
buttons to select a number on the  
screen, and then press [Enter].  
Repeat this for each of the four  
digits in the new PIN number.  
The Confirm screen appears.  
AUX 2  
6
Game/TV  
Prev  
CH  
4
Display  
Tape  
7
Tuner  
8
CD  
9
Display  
Muting  
D.TUN  
Clear  
0
12  
Playlist  
Rec  
Random  
Listening Mode  
Displaying SIRIUS Satellite Radio  
Information  
or  
4–6. SIRIUS Parental Lock  
TUNER  
Edit Code  
New Code  
Confirm  
****  
**  
Enter  
Press the [Display] button  
AV controller  
repeatedly to cycle through the  
available information.  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
ENTER  
RETURN  
SETUP  
EXIT  
MOVE  
INPUT  
RETURN  
Remote  
controller  
Confirm the new PIN number by  
entering it again.  
7
If you confirm the PIN number cor-  
rectly, the new PIN is saved and the  
message “Complete” appears.  
Display  
If you confirm the PIN number incor-  
rectly, “Wrong Code!” appears, and  
you’ll be returned to step 5 to try again.  
The following information can be displayed:  
Channel name  
Press the [Setup] button.  
Channel number & preset number  
8
Setup closes.  
Category  
Artist/composer  
Song title  
Listening mode  
Note:  
If the category, artist/composer, or song title is not avail-  
able, “- - -” will be displayed instead.  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Listening to the Radio—Continued  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
tons to select “5. Satellite  
Radio”, and then press [Enter].  
The Satellite Radio screen appears.  
The name of the currently selected  
input selector is displayed in a box.  
3
4
2
1
2
Remote Mode  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
Zone  
CDR/MD  
Enter  
TV  
Cable  
SAT  
Dock  
Receiver  
Tape/AMP  
Sleep  
Receiver  
Enter  
Dimmer  
+
CH  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
Album  
Enter  
-
Setup  
Prev  
CH  
Display  
Muting  
PositiontheSiriusConnectHome  
antenna so that as many bars as  
possible (up to 3) appear on the  
SIRIUS Satellite signal strength  
meter.  
Playlist  
Rec  
Random  
Positioning the SiriusConnect Home  
Antenna  
4–5. Satellite Radio  
TUNER  
XM Antenna Aiming  
You can check the strength of the SIRIUS Satellite Radio  
signal and adjust the position of the SiriusConnect Home  
antenna accordingly.  
Satellite  
Terrestrial  
SIRIUS Antenna Aiming  
Satellite  
Terrestrial  
Press the [Receiver] Remote  
Mode button, followed by the  
[Tuner] button, and [Setup] but-  
1
siriusID: [  
MOVE  
]
RETURN  
SETUP  
RETURN  
EXIT  
Receiver  
If you cannot receive a satellite signal,  
position the SiriusConnect Home  
antenna so that as many bars as possible  
(up to 3) appear on the SIRIUS Terres-  
trial signal strength meter.  
ton.  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
Notes:  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
• So long as the signal strength is good, you can enjoy  
SIRIUS Satellite Radio by using either satellite or ter-  
restrial reception.  
2
tons to select “4. Source Setup”,  
and then press [Enter].  
Enter  
The “Source Setup” menu appears.  
• Terrestrial signals are only available in certain areas.  
• The SIRIUS information on the Satellite Radio screen  
is only displayed when the “Satellite Radio” mode is  
set to “SIRIUS” or “XM/SIRIUS” (see page 81).  
4. Source Setup  
DVD  
1. IntelliVolume  
2. A/V Sync  
3. Name Edit  
Enter  
4. Picture Adjust  
• If you’re using both XM Satellite Radio and SIRIUS  
Satellite Radio and the “Satellite Radio” mode is set to  
“XM/SIRIUS” (see page 81), signal strength meters  
for both systems appear on the same screen.  
5. Satellite Radio  
6. SIRIUS Parental Lock  
ENTER  
RETURN  
SETUP  
EXIT  
MOVE  
ENTER  
RETURN  
Note:  
If the “Satellite Radio” mode is set to  
“None” (see page 81), the “5. Satellite  
Radio” item is not available.  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Listening to the Radio—Continued  
SIRIUS Satellite Radio Messages  
The following messages may appear while using  
SIRIUS Satellite Radio.  
ACQUIRING  
The SiriusConnect receiver is acquiring the signal or  
no signal is present. Make sure the SiriusConnect  
Home tuner is connected properly and that there are  
no obstacles close by.  
ANTENNA ERROR  
Make sure the SiriusConnect Home tuner is con-  
nected properly.  
SUB UPDATED  
Displayed while your subscription is being updated.  
No operations can be performed until this message  
has cleared.  
UPDATING XXX%  
Displayed while the channel map is being updated.  
Wait until the updating is complete.  
UPDATING  
Displayed while the SiriusConnect receiver’s firm-  
ware is being updated.  
INVALID CHANNEL  
Displayed if you select an unavailable channel.  
CALL SIRIUS  
Displayed when you select a channel to which you  
are not subscribed. Call SIRIUS if you want to sub-  
scribe.  
CHECK SR TUNER  
Displayed if the SiriusConnect receiver is not con-  
nected. Make sure the SiriusConnect receiver is con-  
nected properly, and make sure its AC adapter is  
plugged in.  
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Recording  
This section explains how to record the input source and  
how to record audio and video from separate sources.  
Recording from Different AV Sources  
You can overdub audio onto your video recordings by  
simultaneously recording audio and video from two sep-  
arate sources. This is possible because only the audio  
source is switched when an audio-only input source,  
such as TAPE, Tuner, or CD, is selected, the video  
source remains the same.  
Notes:  
• The surround sound and DSP listening modes cannot  
be recorded.  
• Copy-protected DVDs cannot be recorded.  
• Sources connected to the analog multichannel input  
cannot be recorded.  
Various restrictions apply to digital recording. Refer  
to the manuals supplied with your digital recording  
equipment for more details.  
• Digital input signals are output by only the digital out-  
puts, and analog input signals are output by only the  
analog outputs. There is no internal conversion from  
digital to analog or vice versa.  
In the following example, audio from the CD player con-  
nected to the CD IN and video from the camcorder con-  
nected to the AUX 2 INPUT VIDEO jack are recorded  
by the VCR connected to the VCR/DVR OUT jacks.  
• DTS signals will be recorded as noise, so don’t  
attempt analog recording of DTS CDs or LDs.  
Recording the Input Source  
Camcorder  
Audio sources can be recorded to a recorder (e.g., cas-  
sette deck, CDR, MD) connected to the TAPE OUT or  
DIGITAL OPTICAL OUT jacks. Video sources can be  
recorded to a video recorder (e.g., VCR, DVR) con-  
nected to the VCR/DVR OUT jacks. See pages 28 to 44  
for hookup information.  
video signal  
audio signal  
Use the input selector buttons to  
select the source that you want  
to record.  
1
See “Which Connections Should I  
Use?” on page 29 to see which signals  
can be output and recorded.  
You can watch the source while record-  
ing it. The AV controller’s Master Vol-  
ume control has no effect on recording.  
CD Player  
VCR  
Remote  
controller  
DVD  
1
VCR  
/
DVR  
CBL/SAT  
2
AUX 1  
5
3
AUX 2  
6
Game/TV  
Prepare the camcorder and CD player for  
playback.  
1
4
Tape  
7
Tuner  
8
CD  
9
Phono  
+10  
Prepare the VCR for recording.  
2
3
4
Press the [AUX 2] input selector button.  
On your recorder, start record-  
ing.  
2
Press the [CD] input selector button.  
This selects the CD player as the audio source but  
leaves the camcorder as the video source.  
On the source component, start  
playback.  
3
Start recording on the VCR, then start  
playback on the camcorder and CD player.  
Video from the camcorder and audio from the CD  
player are recorded by the VCR.  
5
Note:  
If you select a different input source during recording,  
that input source will be recorded instead.  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Selecting with the Remote Controller  
Selecting the Listening Modes  
For a description of each listening mode, see “About the  
Listening Modes” on page 97.  
+
CH  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
Album  
-
Prev  
CH  
• The Dolby Digital and DTS listening modes  
can only be selected if your DVD player is  
connected to the AV controller with a digital  
audio connection (coaxial, optical, or HDMI).  
Display  
Muting  
Playlist  
Rec  
Random  
• The listening modes you can select depends  
on the format of the input signal. To check  
the format, see “Displaying Source Informa-  
tion” on page 66.  
Surround  
Stereo  
Listening Mode  
Surround  
,
Stereo  
Repeat  
Audio  
Direct  
Subtitle  
THX  
Play Mode  
All ST  
All ST  
THX  
Test Tone  
CH Sel  
Level-  
Level+  
Direct  
• While a pair of headphones is connected,  
you can only select the Mono, Direct, or Ste-  
reo listening mode.  
Open/Close Video Off  
Audio Sel  
L
Night  
DVD  
Re-EQ  
HDD  
VCR  
RC-691M  
Selecting on the AV Controller  
[Stereo] button  
This button selects the Stereo listening mode.  
[Surround] button  
This button selects the Dolby Digital and DTS lis-  
tening modes.  
Listening Mode [e]/[r] buttons  
Pressing these buttons repeatedly cycles through all  
of the listening modes that can be used with the cur-  
rent input source.  
Stereo Listening Mode  
[Direct] button  
This button selects the Direct listening mode.  
[Stereo] button  
[THX] button  
This button selects the Stereo listening mode.  
This button selects the THX listening modes.  
[All ST] button  
Listening Mode [e]/[r] buttons  
Pressing these buttons repeatedly cycles through all  
of the listening modes that can be used with the cur-  
rent input source.  
This button selects the All Channel Stereo listening  
mode.  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Using the Listening Modes—Continued  
Listening Modes Available for Each Source Format  
Analog and PCM Sources  
: Available Listening Modes  
Multichannel PCM  
Analog/PCM  
Multi  
*1  
*2  
32–96 kHz  
2ch  
176.4/192 kHz  
2ch  
32–96  
176.4/  
Source format  
channel  
Analog  
Multi  
channel  
Mono/Mul  
tiplex  
Multi  
channel  
Mono/Mul  
tiplex  
*1  
*2  
kHz  
192kHz  
Media  
CD, TV, radio,  
DVD  
DVD  
DVD  
Listening Mode  
Direct  
Stereo  
Mono  
Multichannel  
Neo:6  
*4  
*7  
*5*7  
Neural THX  
Dolby PLII Movie/  
Dolby PLIIx Movie  
Dolby PLII Music/  
Dolby PLIIx Music  
Dolby PLII Game/  
*4  
*3  
*4  
*3  
*3  
Dolby PLIIx Game  
*4  
Dolby EX  
Neo:6 Cinema  
Neo:6 Music  
*5  
THX Cinema/Music/Games  
Dolby PLII/Dolby PLIIx Movie  
+ THX Cinema  
Dolby PLII/Dolby PLIIx Music  
*3  
*4  
*3  
*5  
*3  
*3  
*4  
*3  
*5  
+ THX Music  
Dolby PLII/Dolby PLIIx Game  
*3  
*5  
+ THX Games  
Neo:6 Cinema/Music  
*5  
+THX Cinema/Music  
Neo:6 + THX  
*4  
Cinema/Music/Game  
PLII Game  
+ THX Ultra2 Games  
*4  
THX Surround EX  
THX Ultra2  
Cinema/Music/Games  
*4  
Neural THX  
+ THX Cinema/Music/Games  
*7  
*7  
*5  
*5*6  
MonoMovie  
*5*6  
Orchestra  
*5*6  
Unplugged  
*5*6  
Studio-Mix  
*5*6  
TV Logic  
AllChStereo  
FullMono  
*6  
T-D  
*1. 32/44.1/48/88.2/96kHz  
*2. DVD-Audio discs output multichannel 176.4/192 kHz PCM only via HDMI.  
*3. If there are no surround back speakers, Dolby Pro Logic II is used.  
*4. Cannot be selected with some source formats.  
*5. Available only when using surround speakers.  
*6. PCM of 88.2kHz and 96kHz are processed at 44.1kHz and 48kHz respectively.  
*7. It is possible to select it by the signal of 32-48kHz.  
: Requires 6.1/7.1 speakers.  
: Requires 7.1 speakers.  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Using the Listening Modes—Continued  
Dolby Digital, and Dolby Digital Plus Sources  
: Available Listening Modes  
Dolby Digital  
Dolby Digital Plus  
Source format  
Multichannel  
2ch  
Mono/Multiplex Multichannel  
2ch  
Mono/Multiplex  
Media  
DVD, DTV, etc.  
Blu-ray, HD DVD  
Listening Mode  
Direct  
Stereo  
Mono  
*3  
*3  
Neo:6  
*4  
*4  
Neural THX  
DolbyDigital  
*1  
DolbyDigital Plus  
Dolby PLII Movie/  
Dolby PLIIx Movie  
Dolby PLII Music/  
Dolby PLIIx Music  
Dolby PLII Game/  
Dolby PLIIx Game  
*3  
*3  
*3  
*2  
*3  
*2  
*2  
*3  
*3  
Dolby EX  
Neo:6 Cinema  
Neo:6 Music  
*4  
THX Cinema/Music/Games  
Dolby PLII/Dolby PLIIx Movie  
+ THX Cinema  
*3  
*2  
*3  
*2  
*4  
Dolby PLII/Dolby PLIIx Music  
*3  
*2  
*3  
*2  
*4  
+ THX Music  
Dolby PLII/Dolby PLIIx Game  
+ THX Games  
*2  
*2  
*4  
Neo:6 Cinema/Music  
+ THX Cinema/Music  
*4  
Neo:6 + THX  
Cinema/Music/Game  
*3  
*3  
PLII Game  
+ THX Ultra2 Games  
THX Surround EX  
*3  
*3  
*3  
THX Ultra2  
Cinema/Music/Games  
*3  
Neural THX  
+ THX Cinema/Music/Games*4  
*4  
MonoMovie  
*4  
Orchestra  
*4  
Unplugged  
*4  
Studio-Mix  
*4  
TV Logic  
AllChStereo  
FullMono  
T-D  
*1. If there are no surround back speakers, depending on the input signal, Dolby Digital may be used.  
*2. If there are no surround back speakers, Dolby Pro Logic II is used.  
*3. Cannot be selected with some source formats.  
*4. Available only when using surround speakers.  
: Requires 6.1/7.1 speakers.  
: Requires 7.1 speakers.  
Note:  
With some HD DVD and Blu-ray discs, a noise may be heard during playback. This may occur when the audio format  
changes during playback. It is not a malfunction.  
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Listening Modes—Continued  
DTS Sources  
: Available Listening Modes  
DTS, DTS96/24  
DTS-ES  
Discrete/Matrix  
Source format  
Media  
Multichannel  
2ch  
Mono  
DVD, CD, etc.  
DVD, CD, etc.  
Listening Mode  
Direct  
Stereo  
Mono  
DTS, DTS 96/24  
*1  
DTS-ES Discrete/Matrix  
Neo:6  
*3  
*5  
*4*5  
Neural THX  
Dolby PLII Movie/  
Dolby PLIIx Movie  
*3  
*2  
Dolby PLII Music/  
Dolby PLIIx Music  
*3  
*2  
Dolby PLII Game/  
Dolby PLIIx Game  
*2  
*3  
Dolby EX  
Neo:6 Cinema  
Neo:6 Music  
*4  
THX Cinema/Music/Games  
*4  
DTS-ES Discrete/Matrix  
*1  
+ THX Cinema/Music/Games  
Dolby PLII/Dolby PLIIx Movie  
+ THX Cinema/Music  
*3  
*2  
*4  
Dolby PLII/Dolby PLIIx Music  
+ THX Music  
*2  
*4  
Dolby PLII/Dolby PLIIx Game  
+ THX Games  
*2  
*4  
Neo:6 Cinema/Music  
+ THX Cinema/Music  
*4  
Neo:6 + THX  
Cinema/Music/Game  
*3  
PLII Game  
+ THX Ultra2 Games  
THX Surround EX  
*3  
THX Ultra2  
Cinema/Music/Games  
*3  
Neural THX  
+ THX Cinema/Music/Games  
*5  
*5  
*4  
*4 *5  
MonoMovie  
*4*5  
Orchestra  
*4*5  
Unplugged  
*4*5  
Studio-Mix  
*4*5  
TV Logic  
AllChStereo  
FullMono  
*5  
T-D  
*1. If there are no surround back speakers, DTS is used.  
*2. If there are no surround back speakers, Dolby Pro Logic II is used.  
*3. Cannot be selected with some source formats.  
*4. Available only when using surround speakers.  
*5. DTS 96/24 is processed as DTS.  
: Requires 6.1/7.1 speakers.  
: Requires 7.1 speakers.  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Listening Modes—Continued  
TrueHD Sources  
: Available Listening Modes  
TrueHD  
TrueHD 192kHz  
Source format  
Multichannel  
2ch  
Mono/Multiplex Multichannel  
2ch  
Mono/Multiplex  
Media  
Blu-ray, HD DVD  
Blu-ray, HD DVD  
Listening Mode  
Direct  
Stereo  
Mono  
TrueHD  
*2  
Neo:6  
*4  
*3*4  
Neural THX  
Dolby PLII Movie/  
Dolby PLIIx Movie  
*2  
*1  
Dolby PLII Music/  
Dolby PLIIx Music  
*2  
*1  
Dolby PLII Game/  
Dolby PLIIx Game  
Dolby EX  
*1  
*2  
Neo:6 Cinema  
Neo:6 Music  
*3  
THX Cinema/Music/Games  
Dolby PLII/Dolby PLIIx Movie  
+ THX Cinema  
*2  
*1  
*3  
Dolby PLII/Dolby PLIIx Music  
+ THX Music  
*2  
*1  
*3  
Dolby PLII/Dolby PLIIx Game  
+ THX Games  
*1  
*3  
Neo:6 Cinema/Music  
+ THX Cinema/Music  
*3  
Neo:6 + THX  
Cinema/Music/Game  
*2  
PLII Game  
+ THX Ultra2 Cinema  
THX Surround EX  
*2  
THX Ultra2  
Cinema/Music/Games  
*2  
Neural THX  
+ THX Cinema/Music/Games  
*4  
*4  
*3  
*3  
MonoMovie  
*3  
Orchestra  
*3  
Unplugged  
*3  
Studio-Mix  
*3  
TV Logic  
AllChStereo  
FullMono  
T-D  
*1. If there are no surround back speakers, Dolby Pro Logic II is used.  
*2. Cannot be selected with some source formats.  
*3. Available only when using surround speakers.  
*4. It is possible to select it by the signal of 32-48kHz.  
Requires 6.1/7.1 speakers.  
Requires 7.1 speakers.  
:
:
Note:  
With some HD DVD and Blu-ray discs, a noise may be heard during playback. This may occur when the audio format  
changes during playback. It is not a malfunction.  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Using the Listening Modes—Continued  
DTS-HD Sources  
: Available Listening Modes  
DTS-HD Master Audio 192kHz  
Multi  
DTS-HD High Resolution  
DTS-HD Master Audio  
Source format  
Media  
Multi  
channel  
Multi  
channel  
2ch  
Mono  
2ch  
Mono  
2ch  
Mono  
channel  
Blu-ray, HD DVD  
Blu-ray, HD DVD  
Blu-ray, HD DVD  
Listening Mode  
Direct  
Stereo  
Mono  
DTS-HD High Resolution  
DTS-HD Master Audio  
*2  
*2  
Neo:6  
*4  
*3*4  
*4  
*3*4  
Neural THX  
Dolby PLII Movie/  
Dolby PLIIx Movie  
Dolby PLII Music/  
Dolby PLIIx Music  
Dolby PLII Game/  
Dolby PLIIx Game  
*2  
*2  
*1  
*2  
*2  
*1  
*1  
*2  
*2  
Dolby EX  
Neo:6 Cinema  
Neo:6 Music  
*3  
THX Cinema/Music/Games  
Dolby PLII/Dolby PLIIx Movie  
*2  
*1  
*2  
*1  
*3  
+ THX Cinema  
Dolby PLII/Dolby PLIIx Music  
*2  
*1  
*2  
*1  
*3  
+ THX Music  
Dolby PLII/Dolby PLIIx Game  
*1  
*1  
*3  
+ THX Games  
Neo:6 Cinema/Music  
+ THX Cinema/Music  
Neo:6 + THX  
Cinema/Music/Game  
*3  
*2  
*2  
PLII Game  
+ THX Ultra2 Games  
THX Surround EX  
*2  
*2  
*2  
*2  
THX Ultra2  
Cinema/Music/Games  
Neural THX  
+ THX Cinema/Music/Games  
*4  
*4  
*4  
*4  
*3  
*3  
MonoMovie  
*3  
Orchestra  
*3  
Unplugged  
*3  
Studio-Mix  
*3  
TV Logic  
AllChStereo  
FullMono  
T-D  
*1. If there are no surround back speakers, Dolby Pro Logic II is used.  
*2. Cannot be selected with some source formats.  
*3. Available only when using surround speakers.  
*4. It is possible to select it by the signal of 32-48kHz.  
Requires 6.1/7.1 speakers.  
Requires 7.1 speakers.  
:
:
Note:  
With some HD DVD and Blu-ray discs, a noise may be heard during playback. This may occur when the audio format  
changes during playback. It is not a malfunction.  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Listening Modes—Continued  
DTS Express and DSD Sources  
: Available Listening Modes  
*1  
DTS Express  
Source format  
DSD  
Multichannel  
Multichannel  
2ch  
Mono  
2ch  
(3/2.1)  
Media  
Blu-ray, HD DVD  
SACD  
Listening Mode  
Direct  
Stereo  
Mono  
DTS Express  
DSD  
*3  
Neo:6  
*4  
*4  
Neural THX  
Dolby PLII Movie/  
Dolby PLIIx Movie  
Dolby PLII Music/  
Dolby PLIIx Music  
Dolby PLII Game/  
*3  
*2  
*3  
*2  
*2  
Dolby PLIIx Game  
*3  
Dolby EX  
Neo:6 Cinema  
Neo:6 Music  
*4  
THX Cinema/Music/Games  
Dolby PLII/Dolby PLIIx Movie  
*3  
*2  
*2  
*4  
+ THX Cinema  
Dolby PLII/Dolby PLIIx Music  
*3  
*2  
*2  
*4  
+ THX Music  
Dolby PLII/Dolby PLIIx Game  
*2  
*2  
*4  
+ THX Games  
Neo:6 Cinema/Music  
*4  
+ THX Cinema/Music  
Neo:6 + THX  
*3  
Cinema/Music/Game  
PLII Game  
+ THX Ultra2 Games  
THX Surround EX  
THX Ultra2  
Cinema/Music/Games  
*3  
*3  
Neural THX  
+ THX Cinema/Music/Games  
*4  
*4  
MonoMovie  
*4  
Orchestra  
*4  
Unplugged  
*4  
Studio-Mix  
*4  
TV Logic  
AllChStereo  
FullMono  
T-D  
*1. DSD sources are converted and handled as PCM.  
*2. If there are no surround back speakers, Dolby Pro Logic II is used.  
*3. Cannot be selected with some source formats.  
*4. Available only when using surround speakers.  
Requires 6.1/7.1 speakers.  
Requires 7.1 speakers.  
:
:
If you can select PCM or DSD output on your SACD player, in some cases, selecting PCM will provide  
the best sound quality.  
Hint!  
Note:  
With some HD DVD and Blu-ray discs, a noise may be heard during playback. This may occur when the audio format  
changes during playback. It is not a malfunction.  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Using the Listening Modes—Continued  
Dolby Pro Logic IIx  
About the Listening Modes  
Dolby Pro Logic II  
The AV controller’s listening modes can transform your  
listening room into a movie theater or concert hall, with  
high fidelity and stunning surround sound.  
Dolby Pro Logic IIx expands any 2-channel source for  
7.1-channel playback. It provides a very natural and  
seamless surround-sound experience that fully envelops  
the listener. As well as music and movies, video games  
can also benefit from the dramatic spatial effects and  
vivid imaging. If you’re not using any surround back  
speakers, Dolby Pro Logic II will be used instead of  
Dolby Pro Logic IIx.  
The Listening Mode button illustration shows that  
listening modes can be selected.  
The Listening Mode button illustration shows the  
remote controller buttons.  
See “Selecting the Listening Modes” on page 90 for  
information on the use of the Listening Mode but-  
tons.  
Dolby PLIIx Movie  
Use this mode with any stereo or Dolby Surround  
(Pro Logic) movie (e.g., TV, DVD, VHS).  
Direct  
Dolby PLIIx Music  
Button:  
Direct  
Use this mode with any stereo or Dolby Surround  
(Pro Logic) music source (e.g., CD, radio, cassette,  
TV, VHS, DVD).  
In this mode, audio from the input source is output  
directly with minimal processing, providing high-fidel-  
ity reproduction. All of the source’s audio channels are  
output as they are.  
Dolby PLIIx Game  
Use this mode with video games, especially those  
that bear the Dolby Pro Logic II logo.  
Stereo  
Button:  
Stereo  
Sound is output by the front left and right speakers and  
subwoofer.  
Dolby Digital  
Use this mode with DVDs that bear the Dolby Digital  
logo, and Dolby Digital TV broadcasts. This is the most  
common digital surround-sound format, and it’ll put you  
right in the middle of the action, just like being in a  
movie theater or concert hall.  
Mono  
Use this mode when watching an old movie with a mono  
soundtrack, or use it with the foreign language  
soundtracks recorded in the left and right channels of some  
movies. It can also be used with DVDs or other sources  
containing multiplexed audio, such as karaoke DVDs.  
5.1-channel source + Dolby EX  
Multichannel  
These modes expand 5.1-channel sources for 6.1/7.1-  
channel playback. They’re especially suited to Dolby  
EX soundtracks that include a matrix-encoded surround  
back channel. The additional channel adds an extra  
dimension and provides an enveloping surround sound  
experience, perfect for rotating and fly-by sound effects.  
This mode is for use with analog or PCM multichannel  
sources.  
Dolby Digital Plus  
Developed for use with HDTV, including the new video  
disc formats Blu-ray and HD DVD, this is the latest mul-  
tichannel audio format from Dolby. It supports up to 7.1  
channels with 48 kHz sampling rate.  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Using the Listening Modes—Continued  
Dolby TrueHD  
DTS Neo:6  
Designed to take full advantage of the additional storage  
space offered by the new Blu-ray and HD DVD disc for-  
mats, this new Dolby format offers up to 7.1 discrete  
channels of digital audio with 48/96 kHz, up to 5.1-chan-  
nels with 192 kHz sampling rate.  
This mode expands any 2-channel source for up to 7.1-  
channel playback. It uses seven full-bandwidth channels  
of matrix decoding for matrix-encoded material, provid-  
ing a very natural and seamless surround sound experi-  
ence that fully envelops the listener.  
For the signals supported by the AV controller, see  
page 94.  
Neo:6 Cinema  
Use this mode with any stereo movie (e.g., TV,  
DVD, VHS).  
5.1-channel source + Dolby PLIIx Music  
These modes use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music mode to  
expand 5.1-channel sources for 6.1/7.1-channel playback.  
Neo:6 Music  
Use this mode with any stereo music source (e.g.,  
CD, radio, cassette, TV, VHS, DVD).  
5.1-channel source + Dolby PLIIx Movie  
These modes use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie mode  
to expand 5.1-channel sources for 7.1-channel playback.  
5.1-channel source + Neo:6  
This mode uses Neo:6 to expand 5.1-channel sources for  
6.1/7.1-channel playback.  
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio  
DTS  
Developed for use with HDTV, including the new video  
disc formats Blu-ray and HD DVD, this is the latest mul-  
tichannel audio format from DTS. It supports up to 7.1  
channels with 96 kHz sampling rate.  
The DTS digital surround-sound format supports up to  
5.1 discrete channels and uses less compression for high-  
fidelity reproduction. Use it with DVDs and CDs that  
bear the DTS logo.  
DTS-HD Master Audio  
DTS 96/24  
Designed to take full advantage of the additional storage  
space offered by the new Blu-ray and HD DVD disc for-  
mats, this new DTS format offers up to 7.1 discrete chan-  
nels of digital audio with 48/96 kHz, up to 5.1-channels  
with 192 kHz sampling rate.  
This mode is for use with DTS 96/24 sources. This is  
high-resolution DTS with a 96 kHz sampling rate and  
24-bit resolution, providing superior fidelity. Use it with  
DVDs that bear the DTS 96/24 logo.  
DTS-ES Discrete  
For the signals supported by the AV controller, see  
page 95.  
This mode is for use with DTS-ES Discrete soundtracks,  
which use a discrete surround back channel for true  
6.1/7.1-channel playback. The seven totally separate  
audio channels provide better spatial imaging and 360-  
degree sound localization, perfect for sounds that pan  
across the surround channels. Use it with DVDs that bear  
the DTS-ES logo, especially those with a DTS-ES Dis-  
crete soundtrack.  
DTS Express  
This format supports up to 5.1 channels and a lower sam-  
pling rate of 48 kHz. Applications include interactive  
audio and commentary encoding for HD DVD Sub  
Audio and Blu-ray Secondary Audio. Also broadcast  
and media servers.  
DTS-ES Matrix  
This mode is for use with DTS-ES Matrix soundtracks,  
which use a matrix-encoded back-channel for 6.1/7.1-  
channel playback. Use it with DVDs that bear the DTS-  
ES logo, especially those with a DTS-ES Matrix  
soundtrack.  
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Listening Modes—Continued  
Neural THX 5.1/7.1  
THX Games  
Neural-THX Surround employs psychoacoustic fre-  
quency domain processing, which allows delivery of a  
more detailed sound stage, with superior channel separa-  
tion and localization of audio elements. The Neural THX  
5.1 and Neural THX 7.1 modes can expand any 2-chan-  
nel stereo source for 5.1- or 7.1-channel playback,  
respectively. Use them with CD, radio, cassette, TV,  
VHS, DVD, and other 2-channel stereo sources, includ-  
ing video games. Neural-THX Surround can also be  
used by broadcasters to encode and transmit surround-  
sound content over a stereo signal, which listeners can  
enjoy as either surround sound or normal stereo. XM  
Satellite Radio, for example, is using Neural-THX Sur-  
round on select channels, which the AV controller can  
expand from 5.1 channels to 7.1 channels.  
THX Games mode is meant for spatially accurate  
playback of game audio, which is often mixed simi-  
larly to movies but in a smaller environment. THX  
Loudness Plus is configured for game audio levels,  
with Timbre Matching active.  
THX Ultra2 Cinema  
This mode expands 5.1-channel sources for 7.1-  
channel playback. It does this by analyzing the com-  
position of the surround source, optimizing the  
ambient and directional sounds to produce the sur-  
round back channel output.  
THX Ultra2 Music  
This mode is designed for use with music. It expands  
5.1-channel sources for 7.1-channel playback.  
THX Ultra2 Games  
This mode is designed for use with video games. It  
can expand 5.1-channel sources for 6.1/7.1-channel  
playback.  
DSD  
DSD stands for Direct Stream Digital and is the format  
used to store digital audio on Super Audio CDs (SACD).  
This mode can be used with SACDs that feature multi-  
channel audio.  
THX Surround EX  
This mode expands 5.1-channel sources for 6.1/7.1-  
channel playback. It’s especially suited to Dolby  
Digital EX sources. THX Surround EX, also known  
as Dolby Digital Surround EX, is a joint develop-  
ment between Dolby Laboratories and THX Ltd.  
THX  
Founded by George Lucas, THX develops stringent  
standards that ensure movies are reproduced in movie  
theaters and home theaters just as the director intended.  
THX Modes carefully optimize the tonal and spatial  
characteristics of the soundtrack for reproduction in the  
home-theater environment. They can be used with 2-  
channel matrixed and multichannel sources.  
Surround back speaker output depends on the source  
material and the selected listening mode.  
THX Cinema  
THX Cinema mode corrects theatrical soundtracks  
for playback in a home theater environment. In this  
mode, THX Loudness Plus is configured for cinema  
levels and Re-EQ, Timbre Matching, and Adaptive  
Decorrelation are active.  
THX Music  
THX Music mode is tailored for listening to music,  
which is typically mastered at significantly higher  
levels than movies. In this mode, THX Loudness  
Plus is configured for music playback and only Tim-  
bre Matching is active.  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Listening Modes—Continued  
Onkyo Original DSP Modes  
Mono Movie  
This mode is suitable for old movies and other mono  
sources. The center speaker outputs the sound as it is,  
while reverb is applied to the sound output by the other  
speakers, giving presence to even mono material.  
Orchestra  
Suitable for classical or operatic music, this mode  
emphasizes the surround channels in order to widen the  
stereo image, and simulates the natural reverberation of  
a large hall.  
Unplugged  
Suitable for acoustic instruments, vocals, and jazz, this  
mode emphasizes the front stereo image, giving the  
impression of being right in front of the stage.  
Studio-Mix  
Suitable for rock or pop music, listening to music in this  
mode creates a lively sound field with a powerful acous-  
tic image, like being at a club or rock concert.  
TV Logic  
This mode adds realistic acoustics to TV shows pro-  
duced in a TV studio, surround effects to the entire  
sound, and clarity to voices.  
All Ch Stereo  
Ideal for background music, this mode fills the entire lis-  
tening area with stereo sound from the front, surround,  
and surround back speakers.  
Full Mono  
In this mode, all speakers output the same sound in  
mono, so the sound you hear is the same regardless of  
where you are within the listening room.  
T-D (Theater-Dimensional)  
With this mode you can enjoy a virtual 5.1 surround  
sound even with only two or three speakers. This works  
by controlling how sounds reach the listener’s left and  
right ears. Good results may not be possible if there’s too  
much reverb, so we recommend that you use this mode  
in an environment with little or no natural reverb.  
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Advanced Setup  
The onscreen setup menus appear on the connected TV and provide a convenient way  
to change the AV controller’s various settings. Settings are organized into eight cate-  
gories on the main menu, most containing a submenu.  
MENU  
1. Input/Output Assign  
2. Speaker Setup  
3. Audio Adjust  
4. Source Setup  
5. Listening Mode Preset  
6. Miscellaneous  
7. Hardware Setup  
8. Lock Setup  
The onscreen menus shown in this manual may be  
slightly different from what you see on your TV.  
ENTER  
RETURN  
SETUP  
EXIT  
MOVE  
ENTER  
RETURN  
Menu Map  
The following map shows how the setup menus are organized. Use the page numbers to locate information about items.  
Main menu  
Submenu  
pages 49–54  
MENU  
1. Input/Output Assign  
2. Speaker Setup  
3. Audio Adjust  
1. Input/Output Assign  
1. Monitor Out  
2. HDMI Input  
3. Component Video Input  
4. Digital Audio Input  
5. Analog Audio Input  
4. Source Setup  
5. Listening Mode Preset  
6. Miscellaneous  
7. Hardware Setup  
8. Lock Setup  
pages 104–112  
2. Speaker Setup  
1. Speaker Settings  
2. Speaker Config  
3. Speaker Distance  
4. Level Calibration  
5. Equalizer Settings  
6. THX Audio Setup  
page 123  
6. Miscellaneous  
1. Volume Setup  
2. OSD Setup  
3. 12V Trigger  
4. 12V Trigger  
5. 12V Trigger  
A
B
C
Setup  
Setup  
Setup  
page 55  
page 113  
3. Audio Adjust  
1. Tone Control  
2. DSD  
page 56  
page 125  
3. Multiplex/Mono  
4. PLIIx/Neo:6  
5. Dolby EX  
6. Theater-Dimensional  
7. LFE Level  
7. Hardware Setup  
1. Remote Control  
2. Zone2/Zone3  
3. Tuner  
4. Analog Multich  
5. HDMI  
6. Network  
pages 117–118  
4. Source Setup  
page 57  
DVD  
page 128  
1. IntelliVolume  
2. A/V Sync  
3. Name Edit  
8. Lock Setup  
4. Picture Adjust  
5. Satellite Radio  
6. SIRIUS Parental Lock  
Lock  
Unlocked  
page 122  
5. Listening Mode Preset  
1. DVD  
2. VCR/DVR  
3. CBL/SAT  
4. GAME/TV  
5. AUX1  
6. AUX2  
7. TAPE  
8. TUNER  
9. CD  
10. PHONO  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Advanced Setup—Continued  
Monitor Out Setup  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
tons to select an item, and then  
press [Enter].  
3
4
This section explains items on the “Input/Output  
Assign” menu.  
Enter  
The screen for that item appears.  
On  
Standby  
TV  
Enter  
Input  
DVD  
1
VCR  
/
DVR  
CBL/SAT  
2
AUX 1  
5
3
+
TV CH  
-
AUX 2  
6
Game/TV  
4
Tape  
7
Tuner  
8
CD  
9
TV VOL  
Phono  
D.TUN  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
tons to select an item, and use  
the Left and Right [e]/[r] but-  
tons to change it.  
+10  
-- --- 10  
/
Clear  
0
11  
12  
Input Selector  
Macro  
Zone  
3
2
1
2
3
Remote Mode  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
Zone  
Enter  
CDR/MD  
The items are explained below.  
TV  
Cable  
SAT  
Dock  
Receiver  
Tape/AMP  
Sleep  
1
Dimmer  
2, 3  
1, 5  
2–4  
+
CH  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
Album  
-
Enter  
Prev  
CH  
ay  
Muting  
When you’ve finished, press the  
[Setup] button.  
5
Setup closes.  
Press the [Receiver] button, fol-  
lowed by the [Setup] button.  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
1
2
Receiver  
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make  
sure the appropriate external input is  
selected on your TV.  
Note:  
This procedure can also be performed on the AV control-  
ler by using its [Setup] button, arrow buttons, and [Enter]  
button.  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
tons to select “1. Input/Output  
Assign”, and then press [Enter].  
The “Input/Output Assign” menu  
appears.  
Enter  
1. Input/Output Assign  
1. Monitor Out  
2. HDMI Input  
Enter  
3. Component Video Input  
4. Digital Audio Input  
5. Analog Audio Input  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Advanced Setup—Continued  
R Brightness  
Monitor Out  
With this setting you can adjust the picture red bright-  
ness.  
Resolution  
You can specify the output resolution for the HDMI out-  
puts and have the AV controller upconvert the picture  
resolution as necessary to match the resolution sup-  
ported by your TV.  
Can be adjusted from –50 to +50 in steps of 1 (default is  
0).  
“–50” is the darkest.  
“+50” is the brightest.  
Through: Select this to pass video through the AV con-  
troller at the same resolution and with no  
conversion (default).  
R Contrast  
With this setting you can adjust red Contrast.  
Auto:  
Select this to have the AV controller auto-  
matically convert video at resolutions not  
supported by your TV.  
(Not available when the “Monitor Out” set-  
ting is set to “Analog”.)  
Can be adjusted from –50 to +50 in steps of 1 (default is  
0).  
“–50” is the least.  
“+50” is the greatest.  
G Brightness  
480p (480/576p):  
With this setting you can adjust the picture green bright-  
ness.  
Select this for 480p or 576p output and  
video conversion as necessary.  
720p:  
1080i:  
1080p:  
Select this for 720p output and video con-  
version as necessary.  
Select this for 1080i output and video con-  
version as necessary.  
Select this for 1080p output and video con-  
version as necessary.  
Can be adjusted from –50 to +50 in steps of 1 (default is  
0).  
“–50” is the darkest.  
“+50” is the brightest.  
G Contrast  
With this setting you can adjust green Contrast.  
Can be adjusted from –50 to +50 in steps of 1 (default is  
(Not available when the “Monitor Out” setting  
is set to “Analog”.)  
Source: Output will be according to the resolution level  
which was set with Resolution inside Source:  
4-4. Picture Adjust. (Setting for each Source  
becomes possible.)  
0).  
“–50” is the least.  
“+50” is the greatest.  
B Brightness  
With this setting you can adjust the picture blue bright-  
ness.  
Can be adjusted from –50 to +50 in steps of 1 (default is  
0).  
Brightness  
With this setting you can adjust the picture brightness.  
Can be adjusted from –50 to +50 in steps of 1 (default is  
0).  
“–50” is the darkest.  
“+50” is the brightest.  
“–50” is the darkest.  
“+50” is the brightest.  
Contrast  
B Contrast  
With this setting you can adjust blue Contrast.  
Can be adjusted from –50 to +50 in steps of 1 (default is  
0).  
With this setting you can adjust Contrast.  
Can be adjusted from –50 to +50 in steps of 1 (default is  
0).  
“–50” is the least.  
“+50” is the greatest.  
“–50” is the least.  
“+50” is the greatest.  
Hue  
Component Out2  
With this setting you can adjust the red/green balance.  
Can be adjusted from –20 to +20 in steps of 1 (default is  
0).  
Use this setting if you connect the AV controller’s COM-  
PONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT 1 or COMPO-  
NENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT 2/ZONE 2 OUT to  
your TV.  
“–20” is the strongest green.  
“+20” is the strongest red.  
Saturation  
With this setting you can adjust saturation.  
Can be adjusted from –50 to +50 in steps of 1 (default is  
0).  
“–50” is the weakest color.  
“+50” is the strongest color.  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Setup—Continued  
Speaker Setup  
Press the [Receiver] Remote  
Mode button, followed by the  
[Setup] button.  
1
2
This section explains items on the “Speaker Setup”  
menu.  
Receiver  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
Some of the speaker settings are set automatically by the  
Automatic Speaker Setup function (see page 58).  
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make  
sure the appropriate external input is  
selected on your TV.  
-- ---
/
Input Se
Macro  
Zone  
3
2
1
2
3
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
tons to select “2. Speaker  
Remote Mode  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
Zone  
CDR/MD  
TV  
Cable  
SAT  
Dock  
Receiver  
Tape/AMP  
Sleep  
Setup”, and then press [Enter].  
The “Speaker Setup” menu appears.  
1
Dimmer  
Enter  
2–11  
+
2. Speaker Setup  
CH  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
Album  
1. Speaker Settings  
2. Speaker Config  
3. Speaker Distance  
4. Level Calibration  
5. Equalizer Settings  
6. THX Audio Setup  
-
Prev  
CH  
Enter  
1, 12  
Display  
Muting  
ENTER  
RETURN  
SETUP  
EXIT  
MOVE  
ENTER  
RETURN  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
tons to select “2. Speaker Con-  
fig”, and then press [Enter].  
Speaker Settings  
3
See “Speaker Settings” on page 55.  
Enter  
The “Speaker Config” screen appears.  
Speaker Configuration  
2–2. Speaker Config  
Subwoofer  
Front  
Yes  
Full Band  
100Hz  
100Hz  
100Hz  
2ch  
Center  
Surround  
SurrBack  
SurrBack Ch  
LPF of LFE  
DoubleBass  
Enter  
These settings are set automatically by the Automatic  
Speaker Setup function (see page 58).  
120Hz  
On  
With the Speaker Configuration settings, you can specify  
which speakers are connected and a crossover frequency,  
distance, and level for each speaker.  
RETURN  
SETUP  
EXIT  
MOVE  
VALUE  
RETURN  
The following crossover frequencies can be specified:  
Full Band, 40 Hz, 45 Hz, 50 Hz, 55 Hz, 60 Hz, 70 Hz, 80  
Hz (THX), 90 Hz, 100 Hz, 110 Hz, 120 Hz, 130 Hz, 150  
Hz, or 200 Hz.  
Specify Full Band for speakers that can output low-fre-  
quency bass sounds adequately, for example, speakers  
with a good sized woofer. For smaller speakers, specify  
a crossover frequency. Sounds below the crossover fre-  
quency will then be output by the subwoofer instead of  
the speaker. Refer to your speakers’ manuals to deter-  
mine the optimum crossover frequencies.  
If you’re using THX-certified speakers, specify 80 Hz  
(THX) for all speakers.  
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Advanced Setup—Continued  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
tons to select “SurrBack”, and  
then use the Left and Right  
[e]/[r] buttons to select a cross-  
over frequency.  
4
5
6
7
8
tons to select “Subwoofer”, and  
then use the Left and Right  
[e]/[r] buttons to select:  
Yes: Select if a subwoofer is con-  
nected.  
Enter  
Enter  
If no surround back speakers are con-  
nected, select “None”.  
No: Select if no subwoofer is con-  
nected.  
Notes:  
• Cannot be set if “Speaker Type” is  
set to “Bi-Amp” (page 55), “Sur-  
round” is set to “None” (step 7).  
Enter  
Enter  
• Cannot select “Full Band” if “Sur-  
round” (step 7) is set to anything  
other than “Full Band”.  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
tons to select “Front”, and then  
use the Left and Right [e]/[r]  
buttons to select a crossover fre-  
quency.  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
tons to select “SurrBack Ch”,  
and then use the Left and Right  
[e]/[r] buttons to select:  
1ch: Select if one surround back  
speaker is connected.  
9
Enter  
Enter  
Note:  
Fixed at “Full Band” if “Subwoofer”  
(step 4) is set to “No”.  
2ch: Select if two (left and right)  
surround back speakers are  
connected.  
Enter  
Enter  
Note:  
Cannot be set if “Speaker Type” is set  
to “Bi-Amp” (page 55), “SurrBack” is  
set to “None” (step 8).  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
tons to select “Center”, and then  
use the Left and Right [e]/[r]  
buttons to select a crossover fre-  
quency.  
Continue with step 10 on the next page.  
Enter  
If no center speaker is connected, select  
None.  
Note:  
Cannot select “Full Band” if “Front”  
(step 5) is set to anything other than  
“Full Band”.  
Enter  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
tons to select “Surround”, and  
then use the Left and Right  
[e]/[r] buttons to select a cross-  
over frequency.  
Enter  
If no surround left and right speakers  
are connected, select “None”.  
Note:  
Cannot select “Full Band” if “Front”  
(step 5) is set to anything other than  
“Full Band”.  
Enter  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Advanced Setup—Continued  
Low-Pass Filter for the LFE Channel  
Double Bass  
This setting is not set automatically by the Automatic  
This setting is not set automatically by the Automatic  
Speaker Setup function (see page 58).  
Speaker Setup function (see page 58).  
With this setting, you can specify the cutoff frequency of  
the LFE channel’s low-pass filter (LPF), which can be  
used to filter out unwanted hum. The LPF only applies to  
sources that use the LFE channel.  
With this setting, you can boost bass output by feeding  
front left and right channel bass sounds to the subwoofer.  
This setting can only be made if the “Subwoofer” setting  
in step 4 is set to “Yes”, and the “Front” setting in step 5  
is set to “Full Band”.  
*If you’re using THX-certified speakers, select  
“80Hz(THX)”.  
*If you’re using THX-certified speakers, select  
“Off(THX)”.  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
10  
tons to select “LPF of LFE”, and  
then use the Left and Right  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
tons to select “DoubleBass”, and  
then use the Left and Right  
[e]/[r] buttons to select:  
11  
[e]/[r] buttons to select a low-  
Enter  
pass filter frequency.  
Enter  
The following low-pass filter frequen-  
cies can be selected: “80Hz(THX)”,  
“90Hz”, “100Hz”, “110Hz”, or  
Off(THX):  
The subwoofer only outputs the  
LFE channel.  
“120Hz”.  
Enter  
On:  
In addition to LFE channel sounds,  
the subwoofer outputs front left and  
right channel bass sounds.  
Enter  
Continue with step 11 in the next col-  
umn.  
Press the [Setup] button.  
12  
Setup close.  
Note:  
This procedure can also be performed on the AV control-  
ler by using its [Setup] button, arrow buttons, and [Enter]  
button.  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Setup—Continued  
Speaker Distance  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
tons to select “3. Speaker Dis-  
tance”, and then press [Enter].  
The “Speaker Distance” screen  
appears.  
4
These settings are set automatically by the Automatic  
Speaker Setup function (see page 58).  
Enter  
With the “Speaker Distance” settings, you can specify  
the distance from each speaker to the listening position.  
2–3. Speaker Distance  
Unit  
feet  
12.0ft  
12.0ft  
12.0ft  
12.0ft  
12.0ft  
12.0ft  
12.0ft  
Left  
P
Enter  
Center  
Right  
SurrRight  
SurrBack  
SurrLeft  
Subwoofer  
+10  
0
-- --- 10  
/
11  
Input Selector  
Macro  
Zone  
3
2
1
2
3
Remote Mode  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
Zone  
CDR/MD  
TV  
Cable  
SAT  
Dock  
Receiver  
Tape/AMP  
Sleep  
2
RETURN  
SETUP  
EXIT  
MOVE  
VALUE  
RETURN  
Dimmer  
3–7  
Note:  
+
Speakers that you set to “No” or  
“None” in the Speaker Configuration  
(page 104) cannot be selected.  
CH  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
Album  
-
Prev  
CH  
2, 8  
Display  
Muting  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
tons to select “Unit”, and then  
use the Left and Right [e]/[r]  
buttons to select:  
5
Enter  
feet: Select if you want to enter  
distances in feet. Can be set  
from 0.2 to 30 feet in 0.2-foot  
steps.  
Measure and make a note of the  
distance from each speaker to  
the listening position.  
1
2
Press the [Receiver] Remote but-  
ton, followed by the [Setup] but-  
ton.  
meters: Select if you want to enter  
distances in meters. Can be  
set from 0.06 to 9 meters in  
0.06-meter steps.  
Enter  
Receiver  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make  
sure the appropriate external input is  
selected on your TV.  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
tons to select “2. Speaker  
3
Setup”, and then press [Enter].  
Enter  
The “Speaker Setup” menu appears.  
2. Speaker Setup  
1. Speaker Settings  
2. Speaker Config  
3. Speaker Distance  
4. Level Calibration  
5. Equalizer Settings  
6. THX Audio Setup  
Enter  
ENTER  
RETURN  
SETUP  
EXIT  
MOVE  
ENTER  
RETURN  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Setup—Continued  
Speaker Level Calibration  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
6
tons to select a speaker, and use  
the Left and Right [e]/[r] but-  
tons to specify the distance.  
Specify the distance from the speaker  
to your listening position.  
These settings are set automatically by the Automatic  
Speaker Setup function (see page 58).  
Enter  
With the “Level Calibration” settings, you can adjust the  
level of each speaker while listening to the test tone so  
that the volume of each speaker is the same at the listen-  
ing position.  
Notes:  
• The “Center” distance cannot be set  
if the “Center” is set to “None”  
(page 104).  
Enter  
Notes:  
The speakers cannot be calibrated while the output of  
the AV controller is muted.  
• The “SurrRight” and “SurrLeft” dis-  
tances cannot be set if the “Sur-  
• The test tone is output at the standard level for THX,  
which is 0 dB (absolute volume setting 82). If you nor-  
mally listen at volume settings below this, be careful  
because the test tone will be much louder.  
round” is set to “None” (page 104).  
• The “SurrBack R” and “SurrBack L”  
distances cannot be set if “Speaker  
Type” is set to “Bi-Amp” (page 55),  
“SurrBack” is set to “None”  
(page 104).  
7
8
9
Input
Macro  
• The “Subwoofer” distance cannot be  
set if “Subwoofer” is set to “No”  
(page 105).  
2
1
2
3
Remote Mode  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
Zone  
CDR/MD  
TV  
Cable  
SAT  
Dock  
Receiver  
Tape/AMP  
Sleep  
1
Dimmer  
Repeat step 6 for each speaker.  
7
8
2–5  
+
CH  
Press the [Setup] button.  
Setup closes.  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
Album  
-
Prev  
CH  
1, 6  
Display  
Muting  
Note:  
Surround  
This procedure can also be performed on the AV control-  
ler by using its [Setup] button, arrow buttons, and [Enter]  
button.  
Press the [Receiver] Remote but-  
ton, followed by the [Setup] but-  
ton.  
1
Receiver  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make  
sure the appropriate external input is  
selected on your TV.  
108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Advanced Setup—Continued  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
Repeat step 4 until the volume of  
the test tone from each speaker  
is the same.  
2
5
tons to select “2. Speaker  
Setup”, and then press [Enter].  
Enter  
The “Speaker Setup” menu appears.  
If you’re using a handheld sound level  
meter, adjust the level of each speaker  
so that it reads 75 dB SPL at the listen-  
ing position, measured with C-weight-  
ing and slow reading.  
2. Speaker Setup  
1. Speaker Settings  
2. Speaker Config  
3. Speaker Distance  
4. Level Calibration  
5. Equalizer Settings  
6. THX Audio Setup  
Enter  
Press the [Setup] button.  
Setup closes.  
6
ENTER  
RETURN  
SETUP  
EXIT  
MOVE  
ENTER  
RETURN  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
tons to select “4. Level Calibra-  
tion”, and then press [Enter].  
The “Level Calibration” screen appears  
and the pink noise test tone is output by  
the front left speaker.  
3
Notes:  
• Speaker levels can also be adjusted by using the dedi-  
cated buttons on the remote controller. Press the  
[Test Tone] button to output the test tone. Use the  
[CH Sel] button to select each speaker, and use the  
[Level–] and [Level+] buttons to adjust the level.  
Enter  
2–4. Level Calibration  
Enter  
Left  
-12.0dB  
-12.0dB  
-12.0dB  
-12.0dB  
-12.0dB  
-12.0dB  
-12.0dB  
-15.0dB  
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV con-  
troller by using its [Setup] button, arrow buttons, and  
[Enter] button.  
Center  
Right  
SurrRight  
SurrBack R  
SurrBack L  
SurrLeft  
Subwoofer  
RETURN  
SETUP  
EXIT  
MOVE  
VALUE  
RETURN  
Note:  
Levels cannot be adjusted for speakers  
set to “No” or “None” in the Speaker  
Configuration (page 104).  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
tons to select a speaker, and use  
the Left and Right [e]/[r] but-  
tons to adjust the level.  
4
Enter  
Levels can be adjusted from –12 to  
+12 dB in 0.5 dB steps (–15 to +12 dB  
for the subwoofer).  
Notes:  
• The “Center” level cannot be set if  
the “Center” is set to “None”  
(page 104).  
• The “SurrRight” and “SurrLeft” lev-  
els cannot be set if the “Surround” is  
set to “None” (page 104).  
• The “SurrBack R” and “SurrBack L”  
levels cannot be set if “Speaker  
Type” is set to “Bi-Amp” (page 55),  
“SurrBack” is set to “None”  
(page 104).  
• The “Subwoofer” levels cannot be  
set if “Subwoofer” is set to “No”  
(page 105).  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Setup—Continued  
Equalizer Settings  
2–5. Equalizer Settings  
630Hz  
0dB  
0dB  
0dB  
0dB  
0dB  
0dB  
0dB  
0dB  
1000Hz  
1600Hz  
2500Hz  
4000Hz  
6300Hz  
These settings are set automatically by the Automatic  
Speaker Setup function (see page 58).  
10000Hz  
16000Hz  
With the Equalizer settings, you can adjust the tone of  
speakers individually with a 7-band equalizer. The vol-  
ume of each speaker can be set on page 108.  
RETURN  
SETUP  
EXIT  
MOVE  
VALUE  
RETURN  
11  
12  
-- --- 10  
Macro  
Use the Left and Right [e]/[r]  
buttons to set the “Equalizer”  
option to:  
4
2
1
2
3
Remote Mode  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
Zone  
CDR/MD  
TV  
Cable  
SAT  
Dock  
Receiver  
Tape/AMP  
Sleep  
1
Enter  
Dimmer  
Off: Equalizer off, flat response.  
2–7  
+
CH  
Manual: The equalizer for each  
speaker can be set manually.  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
Album  
-
Prev  
CH  
1, 8  
Display  
Muting  
*1  
MultEQ XT  
Press the [Receiver] Remote  
Mode button, followed by the  
[Setup] button.  
*1  
1
2
Dynamic EQ  
Receiver  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
*1  
Dynamic Vol(Light)  
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make  
sure the appropriate external input is  
selected on your TV.  
*1  
Dynamic Vol(Heavy)  
*1 These setting can be selected after having  
performed the Automatic Speaker Setup.  
As soon as the Automatic Speaker Setup is  
complete, it will automatically be set to  
Dynamic EQ™.  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
tons to select “2. Speaker  
Setup”, and then press [Enter].  
When “Dynamic EQ” is selected,  
“MultEQ XT” and “Dynamic EQ”  
Enter  
The “Speaker Setup” menu appears.  
®
2. Speaker Setup  
become available.  
1. Speaker Settings  
2. Speaker Config  
3. Speaker Distance  
4. Level Calibration  
5. Equalizer Settings  
6. THX Audio Setup  
When “Dynamic Vol(Light)” or  
“Dynamic Vol(Heavy)” is selected,  
“MultEQ XT”, “Dynamic EQ”, and  
Enter  
“Dynamic Volume ” become avail-  
able.  
ENTER  
RETURN  
SETUP  
EXIT  
MOVE  
ENTER  
RETURN  
If you selected “Manual”, continue  
with the next step. If you selected oth-  
ers go to step 8.  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
tons to select “5. Equalizer Set-  
tings”, and then press [Enter].  
3
Enter  
The “Equalizer Settings” screen  
appears.  
2–5. Equalizer Settings  
Equalizer  
Channel  
25Hz  
Manual  
Front  
0dB  
Enter  
40Hz  
0dB  
63Hz  
0dB  
100Hz  
160Hz  
250Hz  
400Hz  
0dB  
0dB  
0dB  
0dB  
RETURN  
SETUP  
EXIT  
MOVE  
VALUE  
RETURN  
110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Advanced Setup—Continued  
MultEQ XT  
Audyssey MultEQ XT correction is active (see page 58).  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
tons to select a frequency, and  
then use the Left and Right  
[e]/[r] buttons to adjust the  
level at that frequency.  
6
Dynamic EQ  
“Audyssey MultEQ XT” and “Dynamic EQ” becomes  
active (see page 58).  
Enter  
You can select: “25Hz”, “40Hz”,  
“63Hz”, “100Hz”, “160Hz”, “250Hz”,  
“400Hz”, “630Hz”, “1000Hz”,  
“1600Hz”, “2500Hz”, “4000Hz”,  
“6300Hz”, “10000Hz”, or “16000Hz”.  
And for the subwoofer, “25Hz”,  
“40Hz”, “63Hz”, “100Hz”, or  
“160Hz”.  
Dynamic Vol(Light)  
“Audyssey MultEQ XT”, “Dynamic EQ”, and  
“Dynamic Volume (Light Compression Mode)”  
becomes active (see page 58).  
Enter  
This setting prevents loud and soft sounds from being  
much louder and softer respectively than average  
sounds.  
The volume at each frequency can be  
adjusted from –6 to +6 dB in 1 dB  
steps.  
Dynamic Vol(Heavy)  
“Audyssey MultEQ XT”, “Dynamic EQ”, and  
“Dynamic Volume (Heavy Compression Mode)”  
becomes active (see page 58).  
Tip:  
This setting affects volume the most, causing all sounds  
to be of equal loudness.  
Low frequencies (e.g., 160Hz) affect  
bass sounds; high frequencies (e.g.,  
6300Hz) affect treble sounds.  
Use the Down [w] button to select  
5
“Channel”, and then use the Left  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
tons to select “Channel”, and  
then use the Left and Right  
[e]/[r] buttons to select another  
speaker.  
7
8
and Right [e]/[r] buttons to  
select a speaker.  
Enter  
Enter  
You can select: “Front”, “Center”,  
“Surround”, “SurrBack”, or “Sub-  
woofer”.  
Repeat steps 6 and 7 for each speaker.  
2–5. Equalizer Settings  
Enter  
Equalizer  
Channel  
25Hz  
Manual  
Front  
0dB  
Enter  
40Hz  
63Hz  
0dB  
0dB  
100Hz  
160Hz  
250Hz  
400Hz  
0dB  
0dB  
0dB  
0dB  
RETURN  
SETUP  
EXIT  
MOVE  
VALUE  
RETURN  
Press the [Setup] button.  
The setup menu closes.  
Notes:  
• When the listening mode is set to Direct, no effect will  
be produced.  
• The Equalizer settings have no effect on 176.4/  
192 kHz input signals.  
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV con-  
troller by using its [Setup] button, arrow buttons, and  
[Enter] button.  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Setup—Continued  
THX Audio Setup  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
tons to select “SurrBack Sp  
Spacing”, and use the Left and  
Right [e]/[r] buttons to specify  
the distance between your sur-  
round back speakers:  
> 4ft (>1.2m) (Default): Select this if  
your surround back speakers are more  
than 4 feet (1.2 m) apart.  
4
These settings are not set automatically by the Auto-  
matic Speaker Setup function (see page 58).  
Enter  
With the “SurrBack Sp Spacing” setting, you can specify  
the distance between your surround back speakers.  
If you’re using a THX-certified subwoofer, set the “THX  
Subwoofer” setting to “Yes”. You can then apply THX’s  
Boundary Gain Compensation (BGC) to compensate the  
perceived exaggeration of low frequencies for listeners  
sitting very close to a room boundary (i.e., wall).  
Enter  
< 1ft (< 0.3m): Select this if your sur-  
round back speakers are between 0 and  
1 foot (0–30 cm) apart.  
You can also set the THX Loudness Plus feature “On” or  
“Off”. When the “Loudness Plus” is set to “On”, it is  
possible to enjoy even subtle nuances of audio expres-  
sion at low volume.  
This result is only available when the THX listening  
mode is selected.  
1ft– 4ft (0.3m–1.2m): Select this if  
your surround back speakers are  
between 1 and 4 feet (0.3–1.2 m) apart.  
Note:  
Cannot be set if “SurrBack Ch” is set to  
“2ch” (page 105), “Speaker Type” is  
set to “Bi-Amp” (page 55), “SurrBack”  
is set to “None” (page 105).  
Press the [Receiver] Remote  
Mode button, followed by the  
[Setup] button.  
1
Receiver  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
tons to select “THX Subwoofer”,  
and use the Left and Right  
[e]/[r] buttons to select:  
No: Select this if you do not have  
a THX-certified subwoofer.  
5
6
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make  
sure the appropriate external input is  
selected on your TV.  
Enter  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
2
Yes: Select this if you have a THX-  
certified subwoofer.  
tons to select “2. Speaker  
Setup”, and then press [Enter].  
The “Speaker Setup” menu appears.  
Enter  
Enter  
2. Speaker Setup  
1. Speaker Settings  
2. Speaker Config  
3. Speaker Distance  
4. Level Calibration  
5. Equalizer Settings  
6. THX Audio Setup  
Enter  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
tons to select “BGC”, and use  
the Left and Right [e]/[r] but-  
tons to select:  
Enter  
ENTER  
RETURN  
SETUP  
EXIT  
MOVE  
ENTER  
RETURN  
Off: Select this to turn off BGC.  
On: Select this to turn on BGC.  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
tons to select “6. THX Audio  
Setup”, and then press [Enter].  
3
Note:  
This setting is only available if “THX  
Subwoofer” is set to “Yes” (step 5).  
Enter  
Enter  
The “THX Audio Setup” screen appears.  
2–6. THX Audio Setup  
SurrBack Sp Spacing  
THX Subwoofer  
BGC  
Loudness Plus  
Preserve THX Settings  
> 4ft  
Yes  
Off  
On  
Enter  
- - -  
RETURN  
SETUP  
EXIT  
MOVE  
VALUE  
RETURN  
When “Loudness Plus” is set to “Off”,  
the “Preserve THX settings” can be  
selected.  
112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Setup—Continued  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
Audio Adjust  
7
tons to select “Loudness Plus”,  
and use the Left and Right  
[e]/[r] buttons to select:  
Off: Select this to turn off Loud-  
ness Plus.  
Here you can set listening mode-related settings and  
functions.  
Enter  
Press the [Receiver] Remote  
Mode button, followed by the  
[Setup] button.  
1
On: Select this to turn on Loud-  
ness Plus (default).  
Receiver  
Enter  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
When “Loudness Plus” is set to “Off”,  
the “Preserve THX settings” selection  
will appear under “Loudness Plus”  
(Step 8).  
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make  
sure the appropriate external input is  
selected on your TV.  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
tons to select “Preserve THX set-  
tings”, and use the Left and Right  
[e]/[r] buttons to select:  
8
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
2
tons to select “3. Audio Adjust”,  
and then press [Enter].  
Enter  
Yes: When Yes is selected,  
Audyssey Dynamic EQ™ /  
Audyssey Dynamic Volume  
™ will not be active.  
Enter  
The “Audio Adjust” menu appears.  
3. Audio Adjust  
1. Tone Control  
2. DSD  
No: When No is selected,  
Audyssey Dynamic EQ /  
Audyssey Dynamic Volume  
will be active in THX listen-  
ing mode depending on the  
setting.  
Enter  
3. Multiplex/Mono  
4. PLIIx/Neo:6  
Enter  
5. Dolby EX  
6. Theater-Dimensional  
7. LFE Level  
ENTER  
RETURN  
SETUP  
EXIT  
MOVE  
ENTER  
RETURN  
Note:  
This setting is only available if “Loud-  
ness Plus” is set to “Off” (step 7).  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
tons to select an item, and then  
press [Enter].  
The function menu you selected  
appears.  
3
4
Press the [Setup] button.  
The setup menu closes.  
9
Enter  
Note:  
Enter  
This procedure can also be performed on the AV control-  
ler by using its [Setup] button, arrow buttons, and [Enter]  
button.  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
tons to select the settings, and  
use the Left and Right [e]/[r]  
buttons to set them.  
THX Loudness Plus  
THX Loudness Plus is a new volume control tech-  
nology featured in THX Ultra2 Plus™ and THX  
Select2 Plus™ Certified receivers. With THX Loud-  
ness Plus, home theater audiences can now experi-  
ence the rich details in a surround mix at any volume  
level. A consequence of turning the volume below  
Reference Level is that certain sound elements can  
be lost or perceived differently by the listener. THX  
Loudness Plus compensates for the tonal and spatial  
shifts that occur when the volume is reduced by  
intelligently adjusting ambient surround channel  
levels and frequency response. This enables users to  
experience the true impact of soundtracks regardless  
of the volume setting. THX Loudness Plus is auto-  
matically applied when listening in any THX listen-  
ing mode. The new THX Cinema, THX Music, and  
THX Games modes are tailored to apply the proper  
THX Loudness Plus settings for each type of con-  
tent.  
Enter  
The settings are explained below.  
Enter  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Advanced Setup—Continued  
Multiplex/Mono Settings  
When you’ve finished, press the  
[Setup] button.  
5
Multiplex  
The setup menu closes.  
Input Ch(Mux)  
This setting determines which channel of a stereo multi-  
plex source is output. Use it to select audio channels or  
languages with multiplex sources, multilingual TV  
broadcasts, and so on.  
Note:  
This procedure can also be performed on the AV control-  
ler by using its [Setup] button, arrow buttons, and [Enter]  
button.  
Main: The main channel is output (default).  
Sub: The sub channel is output.  
Main/Sub: Both the main and sub channels are output.  
Tone Control Settings  
Mono  
You can adjust the tone (bass and treble) of the front,  
center, surround, and surr back speakers individually.  
For the subwoofer, you can adjust the bass.  
Input Ch(Mono)  
This setting specifies the channel to be used for playing  
any 2-channel digital source such as Dolby Digital, or  
2-channel analog/PCM source in the Mono listening  
mode.  
L+R: Both the left and right channels are output  
(default).  
Bass  
You can boost or cut low-frequency sounds from –10 dB  
to +10 dB in 1 dB steps.  
Treble  
You can boost or cut high-frequency sounds from  
–10 dB to +10 dB in 1 dB steps.  
L: Only the left channel is output.  
R: Only the right channel is output.  
Notes:  
Output Speaker  
This setting determines which speakers output mono  
audio when the Mono listening mode is selected.  
• The tone control circuits are bypassed when the Direct  
or THX listening mode is selected.  
• This setting is not available when the multichannel  
Analog input is selected.  
C: Mono audio is output by the center speaker  
(default).  
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV con-  
troller by using its [Tone], Plus [+] and Minus [–] but-  
tons (see page 66).  
L/R: Mono audio is output by the front left and right  
speakers.  
DSD Setting  
PLIIx/Neo:6 Settings  
DAC Direct  
PLIIx Music(2ch Input)  
These settings apply to only 2-channel stereo sources.  
This setting determines whether or not DSD (SACD)  
audio signals are passed through the DSP for A/V Sync,  
delay, etc., processing when the Direct listening mode is  
selected.  
If you’re not using any surround back speakers, these  
settings apply to Dolby Pro Logic II, not Dolby Pro  
Logic IIx.  
No: DSD signals are processed by the DSP  
(default).  
Yes: DSD signals are not processed by the DSP.  
Panorama  
With this setting, you can broaden the width of the front  
stereo image when using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music  
listening mode.  
On: Panorama function on.  
Off: Panorama function off (default).  
114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Advanced Setup—Continued  
Dimension  
Theater-Dimensional (T–D) Setting  
With this setting, you can move the sound field forward  
or backward when using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music  
listening mode. It can be adjusted from –3 to +3. The  
default value is 0. Lower settings move the sound field  
forward. Higher settings move it backward.  
Listening Angle  
With this setting, you can optimize the Theater-Dimen-  
sional listening mode by specifying the angle of the front  
left and right speakers relative to the listening position.  
Ideally, the front left and right speakers should be equi-  
distant from the listening position and at an angle close  
to one of the two available settings.  
If the stereo image feels too wide, or there’s too much  
surround sound, move the sound field forward to  
improve the balance. Conversely, if the stereo image  
feels like it’s in mono, or there’s not enough surround  
sound, move it backward.  
Front left speaker  
Front right speaker  
Center Width  
30˚  
With this setting, you can adjust the width of the sound  
from the center speaker when using the Dolby Pro Logic  
IIx Music listening mode. Normally, if you’re using a  
center speaker, the center channel sound is output by  
only the center speaker. (If you’re not using a center  
speaker, the center channel sound will be distributed to  
the front left and right speakers to create a phantom cen-  
ter). This setting controls the front left, right, and center  
mix, allowing you to adjust the weight of the center  
channel sound. It can be adjusted from 0 to 7. The default  
value is 3.  
Wide: Select if the angle is greater than 30 degrees  
(default).  
Narrow:Select if the angle is less than 30 degrees.  
LFE Level Settings  
With these settings, you can set the level of the LFE  
(Low Frequency Effects) channel individually for Dolby  
Digital, DTS, and multichannel PCM sources. The level  
can be set to –, –20 dB, –10 dB, or 0 dB (default).  
Neo:6 Music  
If you find that low-frequency effects are too loud when  
using one of these sources, change the setting to –20 dB  
or –dB.  
Center Image  
The DTS Neo:6 Music listening mode creates 6-channel  
surround sound from 2-channel stereo sources. With this  
setting, you can specify by how much the front left and  
right channel output is attenuated in order to create the  
center channel. It can be adjusted from 0 to 5. The  
default value is 2.  
Dolby Digital  
Sets the level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital and  
Dolby Digital Plus sources.  
DTS  
When set to 0, the front left and right channel output is  
attenuated by half (–6 dB), giving the impression that the  
sound is located centrally. This setting works well when  
the listening position is considerably off center. When  
set to 5, the front left and right channels are not attenu-  
ated, maintaining the original stereo balance.  
Sets the level of the LFE channel for DTS and DTS-HD  
High Resolution sources.  
Multich PCM  
Sets the level of the LFE channel for multichannel PCM  
sources. (Multichannel PCM is input via HDMI.)  
Dolby TrueHD  
Sets the level of the LFE channel for Dolby TrueHD  
sources.  
Dolby EX Settings  
Dolby EX  
This setting determines how Dolby EX signals are han-  
dled.  
DTS-HD Master Audio  
Sets the level of the LFE channel for DTS-HD Master  
Audio sources.  
Auto: When the source is Dolby EX, you can select  
the Dolby EX or THX Surround EX listening  
mode (default).  
DSD  
Sets the level of the LFE channel for DSD sources.  
Manual:When the source is Dolby EX, you can select  
any of the listening modes compatible with this  
format (e.g., Dolby EX, Dolby Pro Logic IIx,  
etc.).  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Setup—Continued  
Optimizer  
The Music Optimizer function enhances the sound qual-  
ity of compressed music files. Use it with music files that  
use “lossy” compression, such as MP3.  
On  
Standby  
TV  
Input  
DVD  
1
VCR  
/
DVR  
CBL/SAT  
+
TV CH  
-
Off: Music Optimizer off (default).  
On: Music Optimizer on.  
2
AUX 1  
5
3
AUX 2  
6
Game/TV  
4
Tape  
7
Tuner  
8
CD  
9
Note:  
TV VOL  
Phono  
D.TUN  
+10  
-- --- 10  
/
Clear  
0
The Music Optimizer function only works with PCM  
digital audio input signals with a sampling rate below  
48 kHz and analog audio input signals. The Music Opti-  
mizer is disabled when the Direct listening mode is  
selected.  
11  
12  
Input Selector  
Macro  
Zone  
3
2
1
2
3
Remote Mode  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
Zone  
CDR/MD  
TV  
Cable  
SAT  
Dock  
Receiver  
Tape/AMP  
Sleep  
Receiver  
Dimmer  
Using the Re-EQ Function  
+
Enter  
Setup  
CH  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
Album  
With the Re-EQ function, you can compensate a  
soundtrack whose high-frequency content is too harsh,  
making it more suitable for home theater viewing.  
-
Prev  
CH  
Display  
Muting  
This function can be used with the following listening  
modes: Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital EX, Dolby Pro  
Logic II Movie, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie, Dolby Dig-  
ital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, DTS, DTS-ES, DTS Neo:6  
Cinema, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, DTS-HD  
Master Audio, DTS 96/24, THX Cinema, THX Sur-  
round EX, THX Ultra2 Cinema, Neural THX, DSD and  
Multichannel.  
Playlist  
Rec  
Random  
Listening Mode  
Surround  
Stereo  
Repeat  
Audio  
Direct  
Subtitle  
THX  
Play Mode  
All ST  
Direct  
Test Tone  
CH Sel  
Level  
-
Level+  
Open/Close Video Off  
Audio Sel  
L
Night  
DVD  
Re-EQ  
HDD  
Re-EQ  
VCR  
L Night  
RC-691M  
Press the [Receiver] Remote  
Mode button, followed by the  
[Re-EQ] button.  
Receiver  
]
Using the Music Optimizer  
Press the [Re-EQ] button again to turn  
off the Re-EQ function.  
Re-EQ  
You can change various audio settings by pressing the  
[Direct] button.  
Press the [Receiver] Remote  
Mode button, press and hold  
down the [Direct] button.  
1
Remote  
controller  
The setting item appears on the display.  
Receiver  
Direct  
Use the Left and Right [e]/[r]  
buttons to change the setting.  
Repeat this step for the other settings.  
2
Enter  
116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Advanced Setup—Continued  
Using the Late Night Function  
Source Setup  
With the Late Night function, you can reduce the  
dynamic range of Dolby Digital material so that you can  
still hear quiet parts even when listening at low volume  
levels—ideal for watching movies late at night when you  
don’t want to disturb anyone.  
This section explains items on the “Source Setup” menu.  
Items can be set individually for each input selector.  
Press the [Receiver] Remote  
Mode button, and then use the  
1
Receiver  
input selector buttons to select  
Press the [Receiver] Remote  
Mode button, and then press the  
[COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR  
OUT 1] button repeatedly.  
For Dolby Digital and Dolby Digital  
Plus sources, the options are:  
an input source.  
Receiver  
DVD  
1
VCR  
/
DVR  
CBL/SAT  
2
AUX 1  
5
3
AUX 2  
6
Game/TV  
L Night  
4
Tape  
7
CD  
9
Tuner  
8
Phono  
+10  
Off: Late Night function off  
(default).  
Low: Small reduction in dynamic  
range.  
Press the [Setup] button.  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
2
3
High: Large reduction in dynamic  
range.  
For Dolby TrueHD sources, the options  
are:  
Auto: The dynamic range is con-  
trolled automatically based  
on the source material and the  
current volume setting  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
tons to select “4. Source Setup”,  
and then press [Enter].  
The “Source Setup” menu appears. The  
name of the currently selected input  
selector is displayed in a box.  
Enter  
(default).  
Off: Late Night function off.  
On: Late Night function on.  
4. Source Setup  
DVD  
1. IntelliVolume  
2. A/V Sync  
3. Name Edit  
Enter  
Notes:  
• The Late Night function can be used only when the  
input source is Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, or  
Dolby TrueHD.  
4. Picture Adjust  
5. Satellite Radio  
6. SIRIUS Parental Lock  
• The effect of the Late Night function depends on the  
material that you are playing and the intention of the  
original sound designer, and with some material there  
will be little or no effect when you select the different  
options.  
ENTER  
RETURN  
SETUP  
EXIT  
MOVE  
ENTER  
RETURN  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
tons to select an item, and then  
press [Enter].  
4
• The Late Night function is set to “Off” when the AV  
controller is set to Standby. For Dolby TrueHD  
sources, it will be set to “Auto”.  
Enter  
The screen for that item appears.  
Enter  
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Advanced Setup—Continued  
Name Edit  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
5
You can enter a custom name for each individual input  
selector and radio preset for easy identification. When  
entered, the custom name will appear on the display.  
The custom name is edited using the character input  
screen.  
tons to select an option, and use  
the Left and Right [e]/[r] but-  
tons to change it.  
Enter  
The “Source Setup” menu items are  
explained below.  
1. Use the arrow [q]/[w]/[e]/[r] buttons to select a  
character, and then press [Enter].  
Repeat this step to enter up to 10 characters.  
2. When you’ve finished, to store a name, be sure to  
use the arrow [q]/[w]/[e]/[r] buttons to select  
“OK”, and then press [Enter]. Otherwise it will not  
be saved.  
Enter  
When you’ve finished, press the  
[Setup] button.  
Setup closes.  
6
Name input area  
4-3. Name Edit  
Name  
4-3. Name Edit  
Name  
A
N
a
B
O
b
C
P
c
D
Q
d
E
R
e
r
F
S
f
G
T
g
t
H
U
h
u
I
V
i
J
W
j
K
X
k
L
Y
l
M
Z
0
(
1
)
2
+
3
*
4
=
5
/
6
,
7
:
8
;
9
!
-
.
'
?
_
m
z
OK CANCEL  
n
o
p
q
s
v
w
x
y
IntelliVolume  
DISPLAY  
ENTER  
INPUT  
RETURN  
RETURN  
SETUP  
EXIT  
DISPLAY  
ENTER  
INPUT  
RETURN  
RETURN  
SETUP  
EXIT  
With IntelliVolume, you can set the input level for each  
input selector individually. This is useful if one of your  
source components is louder or quieter than the others.  
(Left)/ (Right):  
Selected when the cursor is moved within  
the Name input area.  
Use the Left and Right [e]/[r] buttons to set the level.  
If a component is noticeably louder than the others, use  
the Left [e] button to reduce its input level. If it’s notice-  
ably quieter, use the Right [r] button to increase its  
input level. The input level can be adjusted from –12 dB  
to +12 dB in 1 dB steps.  
OK:  
Selects when the entry is complete.  
CANCEL:  
Selects when you want to cancel the name  
entry.  
A/V Sync  
When using your DVD player’s progressive scanning  
function, you may find that the picture and sound are out  
of sync. With the “A/V Sync” setting, you can correct this  
by applying a delay to the audio signal. The delay can be  
set from 0 to 250 milliseconds (msec) in 2 millisecond  
steps.  
To correct a character:  
1. Use the arrow [q]/[w]/[e]/[r] buttons to select  
”(Left) or “ ”(Right) and then press [Enter].  
2. Press [Enter] several times to select the incorrect  
character (The cursor moves one letter each time  
[Enter] is pressed).  
Use the Up and Down  
4–2. A/V Sync  
[q]/[w] buttons to  
DVD  
A/V Sync  
100msec  
3. Use the arrow [q]/[w]/[e]/[r] buttons to select the  
select an input selector,  
and use the Left and  
Right [e]/[r] buttons  
to set the delay.  
correct character, and then press [Enter].  
Notes:  
• To name a radio preset, use the [Tuner] button to select  
AM or FM, and then select the preset (see step 1 on  
page 117).  
Press Enter to see picture.  
To view the TV picture  
while setting the delay,  
press [Enter].  
RETURN  
SETUP  
EXIT  
VALUE  
RETURN  
You cannot enter a custom name for XM or SIRIUS  
radio presets.  
If HDMI Lip Sync is enabled (see page 126), and your TV  
or display supports HDMI Lip Sync, the displayed delay  
time will be the A/V Sync delay time. The HDMI Lip  
Sync delay time is displayed underneath in parentheses.  
• To restore a custom name to the default, erase the cus-  
tom name by entering an empty white space for each  
letter.  
Note:  
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV con-  
troller by using its [Setup] button, arrow buttons, and  
[Enter] button.  
A/V Sync cannot be set when the Direct listening mode  
is used with an analog input source.  
118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Advanced Setup—Continued  
Zoom:  
Picture Adjust  
The new “4-4. Picture Adjust” item has been added to  
the “1. Input/Output Assign” menu. This menu and its  
settings can be accessed just like the other menus. The  
settings are explained below.  
Game Mode  
If video signal delay occurs during play on a video com-  
ponent, such as a Game console, connected to the AV  
controller, select “Game Mode” on the input selector  
connected to the component and set it to “On”.  
Use the Left and Right [e]/[r] buttons to select:  
Off: Game Mode off (default).  
On: Game Mode on.  
WideZoom:  
Zoom Mode  
This setting determines the aspect ratio.  
Normal:  
Note:  
The “Zoom Mode” can also be set using the [Display]  
button on the remote controller.  
1. Press and hold the [Display] button until the setting  
Full: (default)  
item appears on the display.  
2. Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] buttons to select  
“Zoom Mode”, and use the Left and Right [e]/[r]  
buttons to change the setting.  
ISF Mode  
The receiver has been designed to incorporate setup and  
calibration standards established by the Imaging Science  
Foundation (ISF). The ISF has developed carefully  
crafted, industry-recognized standards for optimal video  
performance and has implemented a training program  
for technicians and installers to use these standards to  
obtain optimal picture quality from the receiver. Accord-  
ingly, recommends that setup and calibration be per-  
formed by an ISF Certified installation technician.  
Custom: User setting (All items can be freely set.)  
Day:  
Setting when a room is bright.  
Night: Setting when a room is dark.  
Note:  
When “ISF Mode” is selected, the setting from “Resolu-  
tion” to “B Contrast” is changed.  
119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Advanced Setup—Continued  
Resolution  
Picture Mode  
You can specify the output resolution for the HDMI out-  
puts and have the AV controller upconvert the picture  
resolution as necessary to match the resolution sup-  
ported by your TV.  
Available only when Source has been selected under the  
“1-1. Monitor Out” setting.  
DVD-Video disc content originates from either film  
(recorded at 24 frames per second) or video intended for  
TV (recorded at 30 frames per second). With the default  
Picture Mode setting of Auto, the AV controller automat-  
ically detects the type of content and processes it accord-  
ingly to achieve the best picture quality. If the AV  
controller detects the type of content incorrectly due to  
characteristics of the disc, you can select Video or Film  
manually.  
Through: Select this to pass video through the AV con-  
troller at the same resolution and with no  
conversion (default).  
Auto:  
Select this to have the AV controller auto-  
matically convert video at resolutions not  
supported by your TV.  
Auto: The type of content is detected automati-  
cally and processed accordingly (default).  
Video: Select when playing a DVD-Video disc  
whose content originates from video.  
When the “Monitor Out” is set to “Analog”,  
it will operate as “Through”.  
480p (480/576p):  
Film: Select when playing a DVD-Video disc  
whose content originates from film.  
Select this for 480p or 576p output and  
video conversion as necessary.  
Edge Enhancement  
With Edge Enhancement, you can make the picture  
appear sharper.  
Off: Edge enhancement off (default).  
Low: Low edge enhancement.  
Medium: Medium edge enhancement.  
High: High edge enhancement.  
720p:  
Select this for 720p output and video con-  
version as necessary.  
1080i:  
1080p:  
Select this for 1080i output and video con-  
version as necessary.  
Select this for 1080p output and video con-  
version as necessary.  
When the “Monitor Out” is set to “Analog”,  
it will operate as “1080i”.  
Mosquito NR  
Brightness  
With Mosquito Noise Reduction, you can remove the  
shimmering or haziness that sometimes appears around  
objects in the picture. Mosquito noise can be an issue  
with overly compressed MPEG content.  
Off: Mosquito noise reduction off (default).  
Low: Low mosquito noise reduction.  
With this setting you can adjust the picture brightness.  
Can be adjusted from –50 to +50 in steps of 1 (default is  
0).  
“–50” is the darkest.  
“+50” is the brightest.  
Contrast  
Medium: Medium mosquito noise reduction.  
High: High mosquito noise reduction.  
With this setting you can adjust Contrast.  
Can be adjusted from –50 to +50 in steps of 1 (default is  
0).  
Random NR  
With Random Noise Reduction, you can remove indis-  
criminate picture noise, such as film grain.  
Off: Random noise reduction off (default).  
Low: Low random noise reduction.  
Medium: Medium random noise reduction.  
High: High random noise reduction.  
“–50” is the least.  
“+50” is the greatest.  
Hue  
With this setting you can adjust the red/green balance.  
Can be adjusted from –20 to +20 in steps of 1 (default is  
0).  
Block NR  
“–20” is the strongest green.  
“+20” is the strongest red.  
With Block Noise Reduction, you can remove the block  
distortion that sometimes appears in the picture. Block  
noise can be an issue with overly compressed MPEG  
content.  
Saturation  
With this setting you can adjust saturation.  
Can be adjusted from –50 to +50 in steps of 1 (default is  
0).  
Off: Block noise reduction off (default).  
On: Block noise reduction on.  
“–50” is the weakest color.  
“+50” is the strongest color.  
Gamma  
Adjust the balance of incoming picture R (red), G  
(green), and B (blue) color data signal to the output color  
data signal.  
Can be adjusted from –3 to +3 in steps of 1 (default is 0).  
120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Setup—Continued  
R Brightness:  
With this setting you can adjust the picture red bright-  
ness.  
Can be adjusted from –50 to +50 in steps of 1 (default is  
0).  
“–50” is the darkest.  
“+50” is the brightest.  
R Contrast:  
With this setting you can adjust red Contrast.  
Can be adjusted from –50 to +50 in steps of 1 (default is  
0).  
“–50” is the least.  
“+50” is the greatest.  
G Brightness:  
With this setting you can adjust the picture green bright-  
ness.  
Can be adjusted from –50 to +50 in steps of 1 (default is  
0).  
“–50” is the darkest.  
“+50” is the brightest.  
G Contrast:  
With this setting you can adjust green Contrast.  
Can be adjusted from –50 to +50 in steps of 1 (default is  
0).  
“–50” is the least.  
“+50” is the greatest.  
B Brightness:  
With this setting you can adjust the picture blue bright-  
ness.  
Can be adjusted from –50 to +50 in steps of 1 (default is  
0).  
“–50” is the darkest.  
“+50” is the brightest.  
B Contrast:  
With this setting you can adjust blue Contrast.  
Can be adjusted from –50 to +50 in steps of 1 (default is  
0).  
“–50” is the least.  
“+50” is the greatest.  
Satellite Radio  
This item is for use with satellite radio. It’s not available  
if “Satellite Radio” is set to “None” (see page 75). See  
the separate Satellite Radio Guide for more information.  
SIRIUS Parental Lock  
This item is for use with SIRIUS Satellite Radio. It’s not  
available if “Satellite Radio” is set to “None” or “XM”  
(see page 75). See the separate Satellite Radio Guide for  
more information.  
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Setup—Continued  
Listening Mode Presets  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
tons to select an audio format,  
and use the Left and Right  
[e]/[r] buttons to select a listen-  
ing mode.  
Only listening modes compatible with  
the audio format can be selected (see  
page 91).  
4
On the “Listening Mode Preset” menu, you can specify  
a default listening mode for each of the audio formats  
supported by each input selector. The AV controller will  
then select the listening mode automatically depending  
on the format of the input signal. You can still select the  
other listening modes, although the default listening  
mode will be used the next time you turn on the AV con-  
troller.  
Enter  
Analog/PCM: Specifies the default lis-  
tening mode for analog and PCM  
sources.  
Enter  
Press the [Receiver] Remote  
Mode button, followed by the  
[Setup] button.  
1
Dolby Digital: Specifies the default lis-  
tening mode for Dolby Digital and  
Dolby Digital plus sources.  
Receiver  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make  
sure the appropriate external input is  
selected on your TV.  
DTS: Specifies the default listening  
mode for DTS and DTS-HD High Res-  
olution sources.  
D.F. 2ch: Specifies the default listening  
mode for 2-channel (2/0) stereo sources  
in a digital format, such as Dolby Digi-  
tal or DTS.  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
2
tons to select “5. Listening Mode  
Preset”, and then press [Enter].  
D.F. Mono: Specifies the default listen-  
ing mode for mono sources in a digital  
format, such as Dolby Digital or DTS.  
Enter  
The “Listening Mode Preset” menu  
appears.  
Multich PCM: Specifies the default  
listening mode for multichannel PCM  
sources, such as DVD-Audio.  
5. Listening Mode Preset  
1. DVD  
2. VCR/DVR  
Enter  
3. CBL/SAT  
4. GAME/TV  
5. AUX1  
6. AUX2  
7. TAPE  
8. TUNER  
9. CD  
192k/176.4k: Specifies the default lis-  
tening mode for high resolution  
192 kHz and 176.4 kHz digital sources,  
such as DVD-Audio. (input via HDMI)  
10. PHONO  
ENTER  
RETURN  
SETUP  
EXIT  
MOVE  
ENTER  
RETURN  
Dolby TrueHD: Specifies the default  
listening mode for Dolby TrueHD  
sources, such as Blu-ray or HD DVD  
(input via HDMI).  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
tons to select an input selector,  
and then press [Enter].  
3
Enter  
The audio formats supported by that  
input selector appear.  
DTS-HD Master Audio: Specifies the  
default listening mode for DTS-HD  
Master Audio sources, such as Blu-ray  
or HD DVD (input via HDMI).  
5–x. Listening Mode Preset  
DVD  
Analog/PCM  
Dolby Digital  
DTS  
Last Valid  
Last Valid  
Last Valid  
Last Valid  
Last Valid  
DSD: Specifies the default listening  
mode for DSD multichannel sources,  
such as SACD (input via HDMI).  
Enter  
D.F. 2ch  
D.F. Mono  
If the input selector is assigned to an  
HDMI IN, use the Down [w] button to  
select the audio formats shown on the  
following screen.  
When you’ve finished, press the  
[Setup] button.  
Setup closes.  
5
5–x. Listening Mode Preset  
DVD  
Multich PCM  
192k/176.4k  
Dolby TrueHD  
DTS-HD Master Audio  
DSD  
Last Valid  
Last Valid  
Last Valid  
Last Valid  
Last Valid  
Note:  
This procedure can also be performed on the AV control-  
ler by using its [Setup] button, arrow buttons, and [Enter]  
button.  
For the “Tuner” input selector, “Ana-  
log” is the only format available.  
122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Advanced Setup—Continued  
Miscellaneous Setup  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
tons to select an item, and use  
the Left and Right [e]/[r] but-  
tons to change it.  
4
This section explains items on the “Miscellaneous”  
menu.  
Enter  
Clear  
0
-- --
/
The items are explained below.  
Input Sel
Macro  
Zone  
3
2
1
2
3
Remote Mode  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
Zone  
CDR/MD  
TV  
Cable  
SAT  
Dock  
Receiver  
Tape/AMP  
Sleep  
1
Dimmer  
Enter  
2–4  
+
CH  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
Album  
-
Prev  
CH  
1, 5  
When you’ve finished, press the  
[Setup] button.  
Display  
Muting  
5
Setup closes.  
Playlist  
Rec  
Random  
Listening Mode  
Surround  
Stereo  
eat  
Audio  
Subtitle  
THX  
Play Mode  
All ST  
Note:  
This procedure can also be performed on the AV control-  
ler by using its [Setup] button, arrow buttons, and [Enter]  
button.  
Press the [Receiver] Remote  
Mode button, followed by the  
[Setup] button.  
1
2
Receiver  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
Volume Setup  
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make  
sure the appropriate external input is  
selected on your TV.  
Volume Display  
With this setting, you can choose how the volume level  
is displayed.  
Absolute: Display range is “Min”, 0.5 through 99.5,  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
tons to select “6. Miscella-  
neous”, and then press [Enter].  
“Max”.  
Relative: Display range is –dB, –81.5 dB through  
+18.0 dB.  
Enter  
The “Miscellaneous” menu appears.  
The absolute value 82 is equivalent to the relative value  
0 dB.  
6. Miscellaneous  
1. Volume Setup  
2. OSD Setup  
Muting Level  
3. 12V Trigger  
4. 12V Trigger  
5. 12V Trigger  
A
B
C
Setup  
Setup  
Setup  
This setting determines how much the output is muted  
when the Muting function is used (see page 65). It can be  
set to –dB (fully muted) or from –50 dB to –10 dB in  
10 dB steps.  
Enter  
ENTER  
RETURN  
SETUP  
EXIT  
MOVE  
ENTER  
RETURN  
Maximum Volume  
With this setting, you can limit the maximum volume.  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
tons to select an item, and then  
press [Enter].  
3
When the “Volume Display” setting is set to “Absolute”,  
the “Maximum Volume” range is “Off”, 99 to 50. When  
it’s set to “Relative”, the range is “Off”, +17 dB to  
–32 dB. To disable this setting, select “Off”.  
Enter  
The screen for that item appears.  
Enter  
123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Advanced Setup—Continued  
Power On Volume  
This setting determines what the volume will be each  
OSD Setup  
time the AV controller is turned on.  
Immediate Display  
This setting determines whether operation details are  
displayed onscreen immediately after an AV controller  
function is used.  
When the “Volume Display” preference is set to “Abso-  
lute”, the range is “Last”, “Min”, 1 to “Max”. When it’s  
set to “Relative”, the range is “Last”, –dB, –81 dB to  
+18 dB.  
On: Displayed (default).  
Off: Not displayed.  
To use the same volume level as when the AV controller  
was last turned off, select “Last”.  
Even when “On” is selected, operation details may not  
be output if the input source is connected to a COMPO-  
NENT VIDEO IN or HDMI IN.  
For optimal video performance, THX recommends that  
“Immediate Display” be turned off.  
Note:  
The “Power On Volume” setting cannot be set higher  
than the “Maximum Volume” setting.  
Headphone Level  
Monitor Type  
With this setting, you can specify the aspect ratio of your  
TV so that menus are displayed properly.  
With this setting, you can offset the headphone volume  
relative to the main volume. This is useful if your head-  
phones are too loud or too quiet at the volume setting you  
usually use when listening through your speakers. The  
headphone level can be set from –12 dB to +12 dB.  
4:3: Select if your TV is 4:3.  
16:9: Select if your TV is 16:9 (default).  
Zone2 Maximum Volume  
With this setting, you can limit the maximum volume for  
Zone 2.  
Display Position  
This setting determines where on the screen operation  
details are displayed.  
When the “Volume Display” setting is set to “Absolute”,  
the “Maximum Volume” range is “Off”, 99 to 50. When  
it’s set to “Relative”, the range is “Off”, +17 dB to  
–32 dB. To disable this setting, select “Off”.  
Bottom: Bottom of the screen (default).  
Top: Top of the screen.  
TV Format (not North American models)  
See “TV Format Setup (not North American models)”  
on page 56.  
Zone2 Power On Volume  
This setting determines what the volume will be for  
Zone 2 each time the AV controller is turned on.  
Language  
onscreen setup menus. You can select: English, German,  
French, Spanish, Italian, Dutch, Swedish, or Japanese.  
When the “Volume Display” preference is set to “Abso-  
lute”, the range is “Last”, “Min”, 1 to “Max”. When it’s  
set to “Relative”, the range is “Last”, –dB, –81 dB to  
+18 dB.  
12V Trigger A/B/C Setup  
To use the same volume level as when the AV controller  
was last turned off, select “Last”.  
See “Using the 12V Triggers” on page 135.  
Zone3 Maximum Volume  
With this setting, you can limit the maximum volume for  
Zone 3.  
When the “Volume Display” setting is set to “Absolute”,  
the “Maximum Volume” range is “Off”, 99 to 50. When  
it’s set to “Relative”, the range is “Off”, +17 dB to  
–32 dB. To disable this setting, select “Off”.  
Zone3 Power On Volume  
This setting determines what the volume will be for  
Zone 3 each time the AV controller is turned on.  
When the “Volume Display” preference is set to “Abso-  
lute”, the range is “Last”, “Min”, 1 to “Max”. When it’s  
set to “Relative”, the range is “Last”, –dB, –81 dB to  
+18 dB.  
To use the same volume level as when the AV controller  
was last turned off, select “Last”.  
124  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Advanced Setup—Continued  
Hardware Setup  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
tons to select an item, and use  
the Left and Right [e]/[r] but-  
tons to change it.  
4
This section explains items on the Hardware menu.  
Enter  
Remote  
indicator  
The items are explained below.  
On  
Standby  
TV  
Input  
Input  
DVD  
1
VCR  
/
DVR  
CBL/SAT  
Number  
buttons  
2
AUX 1  
5
3
+
TV CH  
-
AUX 2  
6
Game/TV  
When you’ve finished, press the  
[Setup] button.  
Setup closes.  
4
5
Tape  
7
Tuner  
8
CD  
9
TV VOL  
Phono  
D.TUN  
+10  
-- --- 10  
/
Clear  
0
11  
12  
Input Selector  
Macro  
Zone  
3
2
1
2
3
Remote Mode  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
Zone  
CDR/MD  
TV  
Cable  
SAT  
Dock  
Receiver  
Tape/AMP  
Sleep  
Note:  
Receiver  
Dimmer  
This procedure can also be performed on the AV control-  
ler by using its [Setup] button, arrow buttons, and [Enter]  
button.  
+
Enter  
Setup  
CH  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
Album  
-
Remote Control  
Prev  
CH  
Display  
Muting  
Remote ID  
When several Integra/Onkyo components are used in the  
same room, their remote ID codes may overlap. To dif-  
ferentiate the AV controller from the other components,  
you can change its remote ID from 1, the default, to 2 or  
3.  
Playlist  
Random  
Press the [Receiver] Remote  
Mode button, followed by the  
[Setup] button.  
1
Receiver  
Note:  
If you do change the AV controller’s remote ID, be sure  
to change the remote controller to the same ID (see  
below), otherwise, you won’t be able to control it with  
the remote controller.  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make  
sure the appropriate external input is  
selected on your TV.  
Changing the Remote Controller’s ID  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
tons to select “7. Hardware  
Setup”, and then press [Enter].  
2
3
While holding down the  
[Receiver] Remote Mode button,  
press the TV [Input] button.  
The Remote indicator flashes four  
times.  
1
Receiver  
Enter  
The “Hardware Setup” menu appears.  
7. Hardware Setup  
1. Remote Control  
2. Zone2/Zone3  
3. Tuner  
4. Analog Multich  
5. HDMI  
6. Network  
TV  
Input  
Enter  
Use the number buttons to enter  
ID 1, 2, or 3.  
The Remote indicator flashes twice.  
ENTER  
RETURN  
SETUP  
EXIT  
MOVE  
ENTER  
RETURN  
2
DVD  
1
VCR  
/
DVR  
CBL/SAT  
2
3
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
tons to select an item, and then  
press [Enter].  
Enter  
The screen for that item appears.  
Zone2/Zone3  
See “Zone 2 and Zone 3” on page 130.  
125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Advanced Setup—Continued  
Lip Sync  
Tuner  
The Lip Sync function can automatically synchronize  
HDMI audio and video that’s gotten out of sync due to  
the complex digital video processing being performed by  
your HDMI-compatible TV. With HDMI Lip Sync, the  
audio delay required to synchronize the audio and video  
is calculated and applied automatically by the AV con-  
troller.  
AM Freq Step (on some models)  
See “AM Frequency Step Setup (on some models)” on  
page 57.  
Satellite Radio (on North American model)  
If you connect an XM Satellite Radio antenna or SIRIUS  
Satellite Radio antenna to the AV controller (both sold  
separately), set this setting to XM or SIRIUS respec-  
tively. If you connect both types of antenna, select  
XM/SIRIUS. Otherwise, select None (see pages 74–88).  
Disable: HDMI lip sync disabled (default).  
Enable: HDMI lip sync enabled.  
Notes:  
• This function works only if your HDMI-compatible  
TV supports HDMI Lip Sync.  
Analog Multich  
You can check the amount of delay being applied by  
the HDMI Lip Sync function on the “A/V Sync”  
screen (see page 118).  
Subwoofer Input Sensitivity  
Some DVD players output the LFE channel from their  
analog subwoofer output at 15 dB higher than normal.  
With this setting, you can change the AV controller’s  
subwoofer sensitivity to match your DVD player. Note  
that this setting only affects signals connected to the AV  
controller’s MULTI CH: SUBWOOFER jack.  
x.v.Color  
If your HDMI source and HDMI-compatible TV both  
support the “x.v.Color”, you can enable “x.v.Color” on  
the AV controller with this setting.  
Disable: “x.v.Color” disabled (default).  
Enable: “x.v.Color” enabled.  
You can select 0 dB, 5 dB, 10 dB, or 15 dB.  
If you find that your subwoofer is too loud, try the 10 dB  
or 15 dB setting.  
Notes:  
• If the color is unnatural when “x.v.Color” is set to  
“Enable”, change the setting to “Disable”.  
HDMI  
• Refer to the connected component’s instruction man-  
ual for details.  
Audio TV Out  
Control  
This function allows  
connected via HDMI to be controlled with the AV con-  
troller.  
This setting determines whether audio received by an  
HDMI input is output by the HDMI outputs. You may  
want to change this setting to “On” if your TV is con-  
nected to an HDMI output and you want to listen to  
audio from an HDMI component through your TV’s  
speakers. Normally, it should be set to “Off”.  
-compatible components  
Disable:  
Enable:  
disabled (default).  
enabled.  
Off: HDMI audio is not output (default).  
On: HDMI audio is output.  
Notes:  
, which stands for Remote Interactive over  
HDMI, is the name of the system control function  
found on Onkyo components. The AV controller can  
be used with CEC (Consumer Electronics Control),  
which allows system control over HDMI and is part of  
the HDMI standard. CEC provides interoperability  
between various components, however, operation with  
Notes:  
• If “On” is selected and the signal can be output by the  
TV, the AV controller will output no sound through its  
speakers.  
• When “TV Control” is enabled, this setting is set to  
“Auto”.  
components other than  
nents cannot be guaranteed.  
-compatible compo-  
• With some TVs and input signals, no sound may be  
output even if “On” is selected.  
• Set to “Disable” when a connected piece of equipment  
is not compatible or it is unclear whether the equip-  
ment is compatible or not.  
• When the “Audio TV Out” setting is set to “On”, or  
“TV Control” is set to “Enable” and you’re listening  
through your TV’s speakers (see page 38), if you turn  
up the AV controller’s volume control, the sound will  
be output by the AV controller’s speakers. To stop the  
AV controller’s speakers producing sound, change the  
settings, change your TV’s settings, or turn down the  
AV controller’s volume.  
• If movement is unnatural when set to “Enable”, change  
the setting to “Disable”.  
• Refer to the connected component’s instruction man-  
ual for details.  
126  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Advanced Setup—Continued  
Power Control  
To link the power functions of  
Network Settings  
-compatible  
components connected via HDMI, select “Enable”.  
Note:  
When modifying network settings, after modifying it is  
Disable: Power Control disabled.  
Enable: Power Control enabled.  
necessary to execute  
Save Settings.  
Notes:  
This section explains how to configure the AV control-  
ler’s network settings manually.  
• The “Power Control” setting can be set only when the  
above “Control” setting is set to “Enable”.  
If your router’s DHCP server is enabled, you don’t need  
to change any of these settings, as the AV controller is set  
use DHCP to configure itself automatically by default  
(i.e., DHCP is set to Enable). If, however, your router’s  
DHCP server is disabled, for example, you’re using  
static IP addresses, you’ll need to configure these set-  
tings yourself, in which case, a knowledge of Ethernet  
networking is essential.  
• HDMI power control only works with  
-com-  
patible components that support it and may not work  
properly with some components due to their settings  
or compatibility.  
• When set to “Enable”, power consumption will  
increase.  
• Refer to the connected component’s instruction man-  
ual for details.  
What’s DHCP?  
TV Control  
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) is used  
by routers, computers, the AV controller, and other  
devices to automatically configure themselves on a net-  
work.  
Set to “Enable” when you want to control the AV con-  
troller from an  
-compatible TV that is con-  
nected to HDMI.  
Disable: TV Control disabled.  
Enable: TV Control enabled.  
Notes:  
• Set to “Disable” when the TV is not compatible or  
when it is unclear whether the TV is compatible or  
not.  
Press the [Receiver] Remote  
Mode button, followed by the  
[Setup] button.  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make  
sure the appropriate external input is  
selected on your TV.  
1
Receiver  
• The “TV Control” setting can be set only when the  
above “Control” and “Power Control” settings are both  
set to “Enable”.  
• Refer to the connected component’s instruction man-  
ual for details.  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
2
tons to select “7. Hardware  
Note:  
Setup”, and then press [Enter].  
The “Hardware Setup” menu appears.  
After changing the settings of the “Control”, “Power  
Control”, or “TV Control”, turn off the power to all  
connected pieces of equipment and then turn on  
again. Refer to the User’s Manuals for all connected  
pieces of equipment.  
When linking to a TV that conforms to the CEC  
standard, the “Monitor Out” setting must be set to  
“HDMI Main”.  
Enter  
7. Hardware Setup  
1. Remote Control  
2. Zone2/Zone3  
3. Tuner  
4. Analog Multich  
5. HDMI  
6. Network  
Enter  
ENTER  
RETURN  
SETUP  
EXIT  
MOVE  
ENTER  
RETURN  
127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Advanced Setup—Continued  
DHCP  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
3
This setting determines whether or not the AV controller  
uses DHCP to automatically configure its IP Address,  
Subnet Mask, and Gateway settings.  
Enable: DHCP enabled.  
tons to select “6. Network”, and  
then press [Enter].  
Enter  
The “Network” screen appears.  
7-6. Network  
Disable: DHCP disabled.  
MAC Address  
Control  
Port  
xx : xx : xx : xx : xx : xx  
Enable  
xxxxx  
If you select “Disable”, you must configure the “IP  
Address”, “Subnet Mask”, and “Gateway” settings your-  
self.  
Enter  
IP Address  
ENTER  
RETURN  
SETUP  
EXIT  
MOVE  
VALUE  
INPUT  
RETURN  
If you set the “DHCP” setting to “Disable”, you must  
specify an IP address. Enter a static IP address provided  
by your ISP.  
The IP address must be within the following ranges.  
ClassA: 10.0.0.0 to 10.255.255.255  
ClassB: 172.16.0.0 to 172.31.255.255  
ClassC: 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.255  
Most routers use Class C IP addresses.  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
tons to select the settings, and  
use the Left and Right [e]/[r]  
buttons to set them.  
To enter an IP address, select the set-  
ting, and then press [Enter]. The arrow  
[q]/[w]/[e]/[r] buttons can then be  
used to enter numbers. Press [Enter]  
again to set the number.  
4
Enter  
Subnet Mask  
The settings are explained on the next  
page.  
If you set the “DHCP” setting to “Disable”, you must  
specify a subnet mask address.  
Enter the subnet mask address provided by your ISP  
(typically: 255.255.255.0).  
When you’ve finished, press the  
[Setup] button.  
Setup closes.  
5
Gateway  
If you set the “DHCP” setting to “Disable”, you must  
specify a gateway address.  
Enter the gateway address provided by your ISP.  
Note:  
This procedure can also be performed on the AV control-  
ler by using its [Setup] button, arrow buttons, and [Enter]  
button.  
Lock Setup  
Lock  
Mac Address  
With this setting, you can protect your settings by lock-  
ing the setup menus.  
This is the AV controller’s MAC (Media Access Control)  
address. This address cannot be changed.  
Locked: Setup menus locked.  
Unlocked: Setup menus unlocked (default).  
When Locked is selected, only this “Lock Setup” item  
can be accessed.  
Control  
This setting enables or disables control over the network.  
Enable: Control over the network enabled.  
Disable: Control over the network disabled.  
Port  
This is the network port used for control over the net-  
work.  
128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Advanced Setup—Continued  
Selecting Audio Inputs  
Specifying the Digital Signal Format  
1 2  
Playlist  
Rec  
Listening Mode  
Surround  
Stereo  
Repeat  
Audio  
Direct  
Subtitle  
THX  
Play Mode  
All ST  
Test Tone  
CH Sel  
Level-  
Level+  
Open/Close Video Off  
Audio Sel  
L
Night  
DVD  
Re-EQ  
HDD  
Audio Sel  
VCR  
RC-691M  
Normally, the AV controller detects the format of digital  
input signals automatically. However, if you experience  
either of the following issues when playing PCM or DTS  
sources, you can specify the signal format manually.  
• If the beginnings of tracks from a PCM source are cut  
off, try the PCM setting.  
If you connect a component to more than one audio  
input, such as a DVD player connected to analog, digital,  
multichannel, and HDMI inputs, you can use the [Audio  
Sel] button to select which audio input you want to use  
to listen to that component.  
Press the [Audio Sel] button  
• If noise is produced when fast forwarding or rewind-  
ing a DTS CD, try the DTS setting.  
Audio Sel  
repeatedly to select an audio  
input: HDMI > Auto > Multich >  
Analog.  
Press the [Audio Selector] button  
1
HDMI:  
repeatedly to select “Auto”.  
Selects the assigned HDMI IN, and  
the HDMI indicator appears on the  
display. (The HDMI IN must  
already be assigned to the current  
input selector. See page 50.)  
While “Auto” is shown on the  
display, use the Tone Plus [+] and  
Minus [–] buttons to select:  
2
Auto:  
Selects the assigned COAXIAL or  
OPTICAL DIGITAL IN, and the  
DIGITAL indicator appears on the  
display. (The DIGITAL IN must  
already be assigned to the current  
input selector. See page 53.) If there  
is no digital signal, the analog input  
is used instead.  
PCM:  
Only 2-channel PCM format input  
signals will be heard. If the input  
signal is not PCM, the PCM indica-  
tor will flash and noise may also be  
produced.  
DTS:  
Only DTS (but not DTS-HD) for-  
mat input signals will be heard. If  
the input signal is not DTS, the  
DTS indicator will flash and there  
will be no sound.  
Multich:  
Selects the multichannel input, and  
the ANALOG indicator appears on  
the display. (The multichannel input  
must already be assigned to the cur-  
rent input selector. See page 54.)  
Auto (default):  
The format is detected automati-  
cally. If no digital input signal is  
present, the analog input is used  
instead.  
Analog:  
Selects the analog input, and the  
ANALOG indicator appears on the  
display.  
If you assign the balanced input to  
the input selector, the sound will be  
output from equipment connected  
to the BALANCED L and R  
INPUT XLR jacks (see page 54).  
129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Zone 2 and Zone 3  
In addition to your main listening room, you can also enjoy playback in two other rooms, or as we call them, Zone 2  
and Zone 3. And, you can select a different source for each room.  
Zone 2 Video Outputs  
Connecting Zone 2  
The AV controller features a composite video output and  
Zone 2 speakers must be connected to an amp in Zone 2.  
component video output for connection to a TV in Zone  
2, so you can enjoy both audio and video in that zone.  
Connecting Your Zone 2 Speakers  
Hookup  
You can enjoy 2-channel stereo playback in Zone 2 and  
• Use a composite video cable to connect the AV con-  
a different source to those selected for your main room  
troller’s ZONE 2 OUT V jack to a composite video  
and Zone 3.  
input on your Zone 2 TV.  
Hookup  
• Alternatively, use a component video cable to connect  
the AV controller’s COMPONENT VIDEO MONI-  
• Use an RCA audio cable to connect the AV control-  
ler’s ZONE 2 PRE OUT L/R jacks to an analog audio  
TOR OUT 2/ZONE 2 OUT jacks to a component  
input on your Zone 2 amp.  
video input on your Zone 2 TV.  
• Use an RCA audio cable to connect the AV control-  
ler’s ZONE 2 PRE OUT SW jack to the line input on  
a powered subwoofer in Zone 2.  
Main room  
TV  
• Connect your Zone 2 speakers to the speaker terminals  
on your Zone 2 amp.  
Main room  
AV controller  
Multichannel power amp  
AV controller  
Zone 2  
TV  
• If you use the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR  
OUT 2/ZONE 2 OUT, you must set the “Component  
Out2” setting to “Zone 2” (see page 50).  
Zone 2  
Notes:  
• The ZONE 2 OUT V jack outputs video from compo-  
nents connected to composite video inputs and S-  
Video inputs.  
Powered  
subwoofer  
• If you use the ZONE 2 OUT, you must set the “Com-  
ponent Out2” setting to “Zone 2” (see page 52). The  
ZONE 2 OUT outputs video only from components  
Receiver/  
integrated amp  
connected to component video inputs.  
Note:  
With the default settings, the Zone 2 volume must be set  
on the Zone 2 amp. If your Zone 2 amp has no volume  
control, set the “Zone2 Out” setting to “Variable” so that  
you can set the Zone 2 volume on the AV controller (see  
page 132).  
130  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Zone 2 and Zone 3—Continued  
Connecting Zone 3  
Zone 3 speakers must be connected to an amp in Zone 3.  
Connecting Your Zone 3 Speakers  
You can enjoy 2-channel stereo playback in Zone 3 and  
a different source to those selected for your main room  
and Zone 2.  
Hookup  
• Use an RCA audio cable to connect the AV control-  
ler’s ZONE 3 PRE OUT L/R jacks to an analog audio  
input on your Zone 3 amp.  
• Use an RCA audio cable to connect the AV control-  
ler’s ZONE 3 PRE OUT SW jack to the line input on  
a powered subwoofer in Zone 3.  
• Connect your Zone 3 speakers to the speaker termi-  
nals on your Zone 3 amp.  
Main room  
Multichannel power amp  
AV controller  
Zone 3  
LINE INPUT  
IN  
Powered  
R
L
subwoofer  
Receiver/  
integrated amp  
Note:  
With the default settings, the Zone 3 volume must be set  
on the Zone 3 amp. If your Zone 3 amp has no volume  
control, set the “Zone3 Out” setting to “Variable” so that  
you can set the Zone 3 volume on the AV controller (see  
page 132).  
131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Zone 2 and Zone 3—Continued  
Zone 2/Zone 3 Out Settings  
Press the [Setup] button.  
Setup closes.  
5
If you’ve connected your Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers to  
an amp with no volume control, set the “Zone2 Out” or  
“Zone3 Out” setting, respectively, to “Variable” so that  
you can set the zone’s volume, balance, and tone on the  
AV controller.  
Note:  
This procedure can also be performed on the AV control-  
ler by using its [Setup] button, arrow buttons, and [Enter]  
button.  
Press the [Receiver] Remote  
Mode button, followed by the  
[Setup] button.  
1
Receiver  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make  
sure the appropriate external input is  
selected on your TV.  
Using Zone 2 and Zone 3  
This section explains how to use Zone 2 and Zone 3.  
Zone 2  
Zone 3  
Tone  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
2
tons to select “7. Hardware  
Setup”, and then press [Enter].  
The “Hardware Setup” menu appears.  
Enter  
Enter  
Off Level  
,
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
Standby  
On  
3
On  
Standby  
TV  
tons to select “2. Zone2/Zone3”,  
and then press [Enter].  
Input  
DVD  
1
VCR  
/
DVR  
CBL/SAT  
2
AUX 1  
5
3
+
TV CH  
-
Enter  
AUX 2  
6
Game/TV  
The “Zone2/Zone3” screen appears.  
Input  
Selector  
4
Tape  
7
Tuner  
8
CD  
9
7-2. Zone2/Zone3  
TV VOL  
Phono  
D.TUN  
Zone2 Out  
Zone3 Out  
Fixed  
Fixed  
+10  
-- --- 10  
/
Clear  
0
11  
12  
Input Selector  
Macro  
Zone  
3
2
Enter  
1
2
3
Zone3  
Zone2  
Remote Mode  
DVD  
TV  
VCR  
CD  
Zone  
CDR/MD  
Cable  
SAT  
Dock  
Receiver  
Tape/AMP  
Sleep  
Dimmer  
RETURN  
SETUP  
EXIT  
MOVE  
VALUE  
RETURN  
+
CH  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
Album  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
tons to select “Zone2 Out” or  
“Zone3 Out”, and use the Left  
and Right [e]/[r] buttons to  
select:  
4
-
Prev  
CH  
Muting  
Display  
Muting  
Enter  
Playlist  
Rec  
Random  
Fixed:  
Listening Mode  
Surround  
The Zone 2 or Zone 3 volume must  
be set on the amp in that zone.  
Stereo  
Repeat  
Audio  
Direct  
Subtitle  
THX  
Play Mode  
All ST  
Enter  
Variable:  
Test Tone  
CH Sel  
Level  
-
Level+  
Open/Close Video Off  
Audio Sel  
The Zone 2 or Zone 3 volume can  
be set on the AV controller.  
Level–,  
Level+  
L
Night  
DVD  
Re-EQ  
HDD  
VCR  
RC-691M  
132  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Zone 2 and Zone 3—Continued  
Selecting an Input Source for Zones  
Turning Off Zones  
On the remote controller, press  
On the remote controller, press  
the [Zone2] or [Zone 3] Remote  
Mode button.  
1
1
the [Zone2] or [Zone 3] Remote  
Mode button.  
Remote  
Remote  
controller  
controller  
On the AV controller, press the  
[Zone 2] or [Zone 3] button.  
On the AV controller, press the  
[Zone 2] or [Zone 3] button.  
AV controller  
AV controller  
The Zone 2 or Zone 3 indicator flashes,  
and the input selector currently selected  
for the zone appears on the display.  
The Zone 2 or Zone 3 indicator flashes.  
On the remote controller, use the  
Input Selector buttons.  
On the remote controller, press  
the [Standby] button.  
2
2
Remote  
Remote  
controller  
controller  
DVD  
1
VCR  
/
DVR  
CBL/SAT  
On the AV controller, use the  
input selector buttons, or press  
the [Zone 2] or [Zone 3] button  
repeatedly.  
On the AV controller, press the  
[Off] button.  
2
AUX 1  
5
3
AUX 2  
6
Game/TV  
4
Tape  
7
Tuner  
8
CD  
9
The zone is turned off, and the Zone 2  
or Zone 3 indicator goes off.  
Phono  
+10  
AV controller  
The input source is selected, the zone is  
turned on, the name of the input selec-  
tor appears on the display, and the  
Zone 2 or Zone 3 indicator lights con-  
tinuously.  
or  
AV controller  
You can also use the AV controller’s  
Input Selector buttons.  
Notes:  
• To select AM or FM, press the [Tuner] input selector  
button repeatedly. On the North American model, you  
can also select XM or SIRIUS.  
• Only analog input sources are output by the ZONE 2  
PRE OUT, and ZONE 3 PRE OUT. Digital input  
sources are not output. If no sound is heard when an  
input source is selected, check if it’s connected to an  
analog input.  
• While Zone 2 or Zone 3 is on, the Auto Power On/  
Standby and Direct Change u functions do not  
work.  
You cannot select different AM or FM radio stations  
for your main room, Zone 2, and Zone 3. The same  
AM/FM radio station will be heard in each room.  
• On the North American model, you can select a differ-  
ent radio source for each room. For example, XM for  
your main room, SIRIUS for Zone 2, and AM/FM for  
Zone 3.  
133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Zone 2 and Zone 3—Continued  
Adjusting the Volume of Zones  
Adjusting the Tone and Balance of Zones  
On the remote controller, press  
the [Zone2] or [Zone 3] Remote  
Mode button.  
On the AV controller, press the  
[Zone 2] or [Zone 3] button.  
1
1
Remote  
controller  
AV controller  
On the AV controller, press the  
[Zone 2] or [Zone 3] button.  
AV controller  
The Zone 2 or Zone 3 indicator flashes.  
Press the AV controller’s [Tone]  
button repeatedly to select  
2
“Bass” “Treble” or “Balance”.  
On the remote controller, press  
the [Level–] and [Level+] button.  
2
Use the Tone Plus [+] and Minus  
[–] buttons to adjust the Bass,  
Treble or Balance.  
You can boost or cut the Bass or Tre-  
ble from –10 dB to +10 dB in 2 dB  
steps.  
Remote  
3
controller  
On the AV controller, press Up  
[q] and Down [w] button.  
AV controller  
You can adjust the balance from 0 in  
the center to +10 dB to the right or  
+10 dB to the left in 2 dB steps.  
Notes:  
Note:  
• The tone cannot be adjusted for Zone 3.  
Zones can also be unmuted by adjusting the volume.  
• The Zone 2 level, balance, and tone functions have no  
effect on the ZONE 2 PRE OUT when the “Zone2  
Out” setting is set to “Fixed” (page 132).  
Muting Zones  
• The Zone 3 level and balance functions have no effect  
on the ZONE 3 PRE OUT when the “Zone3 Out” set-  
ting is set to “Fixed” (page 132).  
On the remote controller, press  
the [Zone2] or [Zone 3] Remote  
Mode button, and then press the  
[Muting] button.  
To unmute a zone, on the remote  
controller, press the [Zone2] or  
[Zone 3] Remote Mode button,  
and then press the [Muting] but-  
ton again.  
134  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Zone 2 and Zone 3—Continued  
Using the 12V Triggers  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
tons to select “12V Trigger A, B,  
or C,and then press [Enter].  
The “12V Trigger A/B/C Setup” screen  
appears.  
3
The 12V triggers A, B, and C can be used to turn on 12V  
trigger-capable components automatically when they are  
selected as the input source. The triggers can be set so  
that they activate when a connected component is  
selected as the input source for the main room, Zone 2,  
Zone 3, or any combination of rooms.  
Enter  
6-3. 12V Trigger A Setup  
Delay  
0sec  
Main  
Main  
Main  
Main  
Main  
Main  
Main  
Main  
Main  
DVD  
Enter  
When triggered, the output from a 12V TRIGGER OUT  
goes high (+12 volts, 100 milliamperes max).  
VCR/DVR  
CBL/SAT  
GAME/TV  
AUX1  
AUX2  
TAPE  
TUNER  
CD  
C
12V TRIGGER OUT  
RETURN  
SETUP  
EXIT  
MOVE  
VALUE  
RETURN  
A
B
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
tons to select “Delay,and use  
the Left and Right [e]/[r] but-  
tons to select: 0 sec, 1 sec, 2 sec,  
or 3 sec.  
When 0 sec is selected, the trigger sig-  
nal is output as soon as the input source  
is changed.  
4
5
Enter  
Hookup  
• Use a miniplug cable to connect the AV controller’s  
12V TRIGGER OUT A, B, or C jack to the 12 V trig-  
ger input on a connected component.  
Enter  
When several components are turned on simultaneously  
by using triggers A, B, and C, depending on the type of  
components, a large amount of current may be drawn  
momentarily. To prevent this, you can delay trigger sig-  
nals A, B, and C individually. Another application for  
trigger delay is eliminating the “thump” noise that’s  
sometimes heard when a source component is turned on.  
Delaying the trigger signal for your power amplifier so  
that it’s the last component to be turned on will accom-  
plish this.  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
tons to select an input source,  
and use the Left and Right  
[e]/[r] buttons to select an  
option.  
Enter  
Off:  
No trigger signal is output.  
A 12-volt trigger signal is output when  
the connected component is selected as  
the source for:  
Enter  
Press the [Receiver] Remote  
Mode button, followed by the  
1
Main:  
Receiver  
[Setup] button.  
Main room.  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
If the main menu doesn’t appear, make  
sure the appropriate external input is  
selected on your TV.  
Zone2:  
Zone 2.  
Main/Z2:  
Main room or Zone 2.  
Zone3:  
Zone 3.  
Use the Up and Down [q]/[w] but-  
2
Main/Z3:  
tons to select “6. Miscella-  
Main room or Zone 3.  
neous,and then press [Enter].  
The “Miscellaneous” menu appears.  
Enter  
Z2/Z3:  
Zone 2 or Zone 3.  
6. Miscellaneous  
1. Volume Setup  
2. OSD Setup  
3. Trigger A Setup  
4. Trigger B Setup  
5. Trigger C Setup  
Main/Z2/Z3:  
Main room, Zone 2, or Zone 3.  
Enter  
When you’ve finished, press the  
[Setup] button.  
6
Setup closes.  
ENTER  
RETURN  
SETUP  
EXIT  
MOVE  
ENTER  
RETURN  
135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Zone 2 and Zone 3—Continued  
Using a Multiroom Kit with a Cabinet  
Using the Remote Controller in  
In this setup, the IR receiver picks up the infrared signals  
from the remote controller and feeds them to the AV con-  
troller located in the cabinet via the connecting block.  
Zone 2/3 and Multiroom Control Kits  
To control the AV controller with the remote controller  
while you’re in Zone 2 or Zone 3, you’ll need a commer-  
cially available multiroom remote control kit for each  
zone.  
IR Receiver  
• Multiroom kits are made by Niles and Xantech.  
Connecting  
block  
These kits can also be used when there isn’t a clear line  
of sight to the AV controller’s remote sensor, such as  
when it’s installed inside a cabinet.  
IR IN  
A or B  
Using a Multiroom Kit with Zone 2/3  
Inside  
cabinet  
In this setup, the IR receiver in Zone 2/3 picks up the  
infrared signals from the remote controller and feeds  
them through to the AV controller in the main room via  
the connecting block.  
Remote controller  
Signal flow  
Using a Multiroom Kit with Other  
Components  
IR IN  
A or B  
IR Receiver  
Connecting  
In this setup, an IR emitter is connected to the AV con-  
troller’s IR OUT jack and placed in front of the other  
component’s remote control sensor. Infrared signals  
received at the AV controller’s IR IN A or B jack are fed  
through to the other component via the IR emitter. Sig-  
nals picked up by the AV controller’s remote control sen-  
sor are not output.  
block  
Remote controller  
Main room  
Zone 2/3  
IR Receiver  
Connecting  
Signal flow  
block  
The miniplug cable from the connecting block should be  
connected to the AV controller’s IR IN A or B jack, as  
shown below. The IR IN A and B jacks are identical. Up  
IR IN  
A or B  
AV controller  
IR OUT  
to two IR receivers can be connected.  
IR Emitter  
z
From the connecting block  
Remote controller  
Other component  
Miniplug cable  
Signal flow  
The IR emitter should be connected to the AV control-  
ler’s IR OUT jack, as shown below.  
Miniplug cable  
AV controller  
Other component  
Remote control  
sensor  
Emitter  
Miniplug  
IR Emitter  
AV controller  
Signal flow  
136  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Controlling Other Components  
You can control your other components, including those  
made by other manufacturers, with the remote controller.  
This section explains how to:  
• Enter the remote control code for a component that  
you want to control: DVD, TV, VCR, etc.  
While holding down the Remote  
Mode button to which you want  
to enter the code, press the  
[Standby] button.  
2
The Remote indicator lights up.  
• Learn commands directly from another component’s  
remote controller (see page 140).  
• Program the Macro buttons to perform a sequence of  
up to eight remote control actions (see page 141).  
Entering Remote Control Codes  
To control another component, you must first enter that  
component’s remote control code to a Remote Mode but-  
ton. You’ll need to enter a code for each component that  
Within 30 seconds, use the num-  
ber buttons to enter the 4-digit  
remote control code.  
you want to control.  
3
Remote  
indicator  
The Remote indicator flashes twice.  
Standby  
On  
Standby  
TV  
Input  
TV  
I
DVD  
1
VCR  
/
DVR  
CBL/SAT  
2
AUX 1  
5
3
+
TV CH  
-
AUX 2  
6
Game/TV  
Number  
buttons  
4
Tape  
7
Tuner  
8
CD  
9
TV VOL  
Phono  
D.TUN  
+10  
-- --- 10  
/
Clear  
0
11  
12  
Press the Remote Mode button  
again to select the remote con-  
troller mode, point the remote  
controller at the component, and  
check the operation.  
Input Selector  
4
Macro  
Zone  
3
2
1
2
3
Remote Mode  
DVD  
TV  
VCR  
CD  
Zone  
Remote  
Mode  
CDR/MD  
Cable  
SAT  
Dock  
Receiver  
Tape/AMP  
Sleep  
Receiver  
Dimmer  
If the remote controller doesn’t work as  
expected, and several remote codes are  
listed, try each one in turn and use the  
one that works best.  
+
CH  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
Album  
-
Prev  
CH  
Display  
Muting  
Notes:  
• Remote control codes cannot be entered for the  
[Receiver], [Zone 2], and [Zone 3] Remote Mode but-  
tons.  
Playlist  
Rec  
Random  
Listening Mode  
Surround  
Stereo  
• The remote control codes provided are correct at the  
time of printing but subject to change.  
Repeat  
Audio  
Direct  
Subtitle  
THX  
Play Mode  
All ST  
Test Tone  
CH Sel  
Level-  
Level+  
Open/Close Video Off  
Audio Sel  
L
Night  
DVD  
Re-EQ  
HDD  
• The [DVD] and [CD] Remote Mode buttons are  
preprogrammed for use with Integra/Onkyo DVD  
players and CD players, respectively.  
VCR  
RC-691M  
• To control another manufacturer’s CD recorder,  
MD recorder or Onkyo RI Dock, enter the appro-  
priate remote control code to the [CD] Remote  
Mode button.  
Look up the component’s remote  
control code in the separate  
Remote Control Codes list.  
1
The codes are organized by category.  
137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Controlling Other Components—Continued  
Remote Control Codes for Integra/Onkyo  
Components Connected via u  
Integra/Onkyo components that are connected via u  
are controlled by pointing the remote controller at the  
AV controller, not the component. This allows you to  
control components that are out of view, in a rack, for  
example.  
Note:  
If you connect an u-capable Onkyo MiniDisc  
recorder, CD recorder, or RI Dock to the TAPE IN/OUT  
jacks, or connect an RI Dock to the AUX 1 jacks, for u  
to work properly, you must set the Input Display accord-  
ingly (see page 57).  
Resetting the Remote Mode Buttons  
Make sure the Integra/Onkyo component  
1
You can reset a Remote Mode button to its default  
remote control code.  
is connected with an u cable and an ana-  
log audio cable (RCA).  
See page 44 for details.  
While holding down the Remote  
1
Mode button that you want to  
reset, press the TV [9] button.  
The Remote indicator flashes three  
times.  
Enter the appropriate remote control code  
to the Remote Mode button.  
2
• [DVD] Remote Mode button  
5002: Integra/Onkyo DVD player with u  
• [CD] Remote Mode button  
6002: Integra/Onkyo CD player with u  
• [MD] Remote Mode button  
6008: Onkyo MD recorder with u  
Press the Remote Mode button  
again.  
2
• [CDR] Remote Mode button  
The Remote indicator flashes twice,  
indicating that the button has been  
reset.  
6006: Onkyo CD recorder with u  
• [Dock] Remote Mode button  
The [DVD] and [CD] Remote Mode  
buttons are preprogrammed with  
remote control codes for controlling  
Onkyo DVD players and CD players,  
respectively. When these buttons are  
reset, the preprogrammed codes are  
restored.  
6004: Onkyo RI Dock with u  
See the previous page for how to enter remote  
control codes.  
Press the Remote Mode button, point the  
remote controller at the AV controller, and  
operate the component.  
3
Resetting the Remote Controller  
If you want to control an Integra/Onkyo component by  
pointing the remote controller directly at it, or you want  
to control an Integra/Onkyo component that’s not con-  
nected via u, use the following remote control codes:  
• [DVD] Remote Mode button  
You can reset the remote controller to its default settings.  
While holding down the  
1
[Receiver] Remote Mode button,  
press the [Standby] button.  
The Remote indicator flashes five  
times.  
5001: Integra/Onkyo DVD player without u  
(default)  
• [CD] Remote Mode button  
6001: Integra/Onkyo CD player without u (default)  
• [MD] Remote Mode button  
6007: Onkyo MD recorder without u  
Press the [Receiver] Remote  
Mode button again.  
The Remote indicator flashes twice,  
indicating that the remote controller  
has been reset.  
2
• [CDR] Remote Mode button  
6005: Onkyo CD recorder without u  
• [Dock] Remote Mode button  
6003: Onkyo RI Dock without u  
138  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Controlling Other Components—Continued  
To control another component, point the remote controller at it and use the buttons explained below. (You must select  
the appropriate remote controller mode with the Remote Mode buttons first.) With some components, certain buttons  
may not work as expected, and some may not work at all.  
Controlling a TV  
Controlling a VCR  
Controlling a Satellite or  
Cable Receiver  
Press [VCR] first  
Press [Cable] (SAT) first  
Press [TV] first  
On  
Standby  
TV  
1
2
On  
Standby  
On  
Standby  
Input  
TV  
TV  
5
3
Input  
1
2
Input  
1
2
DVD  
1
VCR  
/
DVR  
CBL/SAT  
DVD  
1
VCR/DVR  
CBL/SAT  
2
AUX  
5
3
+
TV CH  
-
DVD  
1
VCR/  
DVR  
CBL/SAT  
2
AUX  
5
3
+
TV CH  
-
1
AUX  
6
2
Game/TV  
2
AUX  
5
3
+
TV CH  
-
1
AUX  
6
2
Game/TV  
4
1
AUX  
6
2
Game/TV  
4
Tape  
7
Tuner  
8
CD  
9
4
Tape  
7
Tuner  
8
CD  
9
Tape  
7
Tuner  
8
CD  
9
TV VOL  
Phono  
D.TUN  
6
TV VOL  
Phono  
D.TUN  
+10  
Clear  
0
TV VOL  
Phono  
D.TUN  
11  
12  
--  
/
--- 10  
+10  
Clear  
0
+10  
Clear  
0
Input Selector  
11  
12  
--  
/
--- 10  
11  
12  
--  
/
--- 10  
Macro  
Input Selector  
Input Selector  
Zone  
3
2
1
2
3
Macro  
Macro  
3
3
Zone  
3
2
1
2
3
Zone  
3
2
Remote Mode  
1
2
3
Remote Mode  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
Zone  
Remote Mode  
CDR/MD  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
Zone  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
Zone  
CDR/MD  
CDR/MD  
TV  
Cable  
SAT  
Dock  
Receiver  
Tape/AMP  
Sleep  
TV  
Cable  
SAT  
Dock  
Receiver  
Tape/AMP  
Sleep  
TV  
Cable  
SAT  
Dock  
Receiver  
Tape/AMP  
Sleep  
Dimmer  
Dimmer  
Dimmer  
8
8
3
+
9
8
9
4
8
4
+
CH  
+
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
Album  
CH  
CH  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
Album  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
Album  
-
8
7
-
-
Prev  
CH  
Prev  
CH  
9
9
8
8
Prev  
CH  
4
Display  
Muting  
5
6
Display  
Muting  
5
6
Display  
Muting  
8
Playlist  
Rec  
Random  
8
Playlist  
Rec  
Random  
Playlist  
Rec  
Random  
7
Listening Mode  
Surround  
Listening Mode  
Surround  
Stereo  
Listening Mode  
Surround  
Stereo  
Stereo  
Repeat  
Audio  
Direct  
Subtitle  
THX  
Play Mode  
All ST  
Repeat  
Audio  
Direct  
Subtitle  
THX  
Play Mode  
All ST  
Repeat  
Audio  
Direct  
Subtitle  
THX  
Play Mode  
All ST  
Test Tone  
CH Sel  
Level  
-
Level+  
Test Tone  
CH Sel  
Level  
-
Level+  
Open/Close Video Off  
Audio Sel  
Test Tone  
CH Sel  
Level  
-
Level+  
Open/Close Video Off  
Audio Sel  
L
Night  
DVD  
Re-EQ  
HDD  
Open/Close Video Off  
Audio Sel  
L
Night  
DVD  
Re-EQ  
HDD  
VCR  
L
Night  
DVD  
Re-EQ  
HDD  
7
VCR  
VCR  
RC-691M  
RC-691M  
RC-691M  
a [On], [Standby], TV [9]*  
a [On], [Standby]  
a [On], [Standby]  
Set the TV to On or Standby.  
Set the satellite/cable receiver  
Set the VCR to On or Standby.  
b Number buttons  
to On or Standby.  
b Number buttons  
Enter numbers.  
b Number buttons  
Enter numbers.  
c [CH +/–], TV CH [+]/[–]*  
Enter numbers.  
c [Clear]  
Select channels on the TV.  
c [Clear]  
Cancels functions.  
d [Prev CH]  
Cancels functions.  
d [CH +/–]  
Selects the previous channel.  
d [CH +/–]  
Selects channels on the VCR.  
e [TV Input]*  
Selects the TV’s external  
inputs.  
Selects satellite/cable chan-  
nels.  
e [Prev CH]  
Selects the previous channel.  
e [Prev CH]  
f Rec [y]  
f TV VOL [q]/[w]*  
Selects the previous channel.  
Starts recording.  
Adjust the TV’s volume.  
f [Guide]  
g Eject [0]  
g [Muting]  
Displays the program guide.  
Ejects the videocassette.  
Mutes the TV.  
g [5], [4]  
h [1], [3], [2], [5], [4]  
Play, Pause, Stop, Rewind, and  
Fast forward.  
h [q]/[w]/[e]/[r]/[Menu]/  
[Enter]/[Return]  
Fast Reverse and Fast forward.  
h [q]/[w]/[e]/[r]/[Menu]/  
[Enter]/[Return]  
Navigate menus on the TV.  
i [q]/[w]/[e]/[r]/[Menu]/  
[Enter]/[Return]  
Navigate menus on the satel-  
lite/cable receiver.  
*Buttons marked with an asterisk  
(*) are exclusively for controlling a  
TV and can be used at any time,  
regardless of the currently selected  
remote controller mode.  
Navigate menus on the VCR.  
139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Controlling Other Components—Continued  
Learning Commands  
If the command is learned successfully,  
the Remote indicator flashes twice.  
The AV controller’s remote controller can learn the com-  
mands of other remote controllers. By transmitting, for  
example, the Play command from your CD player’s  
remote controller, the remote controller can learn it, and  
then transmit the exact same command when its Play  
[1] button is pressed in the CD remote mode.  
This is useful when you’ve entered the appropriate  
remote control code (page 137) but some buttons don’t  
work as expected.  
E
V O L U M  
T I N
M U  
T O N E  
T E S T  
C H S E L  
C
P T  
T U N E R  
D V D  
T A P  
I N P U T  
H O N O  
P
M U L T I - C H  
G R O U P  
M O D E  
S U R  
D I C  
T U N E R  
C
D
V I D E O - 2  
I N P U T E C T O R  
T A P E  
D I M M E R  
About 2 to 6  
inches (5–15 cm)  
V I D E O - 1  
S L E E P  
D V D  
P O W E R  
O
n
D
V
S
t
D
a
1
n
d
G
a
n
b
e
y
/
D
C
TV  
4
R
T
a
/D  
p
V
R
2
e
7
AU  
X1  
I
Phono  
C
+
5
B
T
10  
T
L
V
In  
-
/S  
A
-
u
n
/
-
3
e
T
-
r
A
U
X
-
8
1
0
p
ut  
1
2
Input  
6
Selector0  
C
D
DVD  
+
T
Macro  
9
V
1
D.TUN  
1
C
H
2
C
lear  
R
em  
Supplied  
VCR  
T
1
2
ote  
M
V
V
O
L
Cable  
3
o
SAT  
de  
CD  
CD  
R/MD  
Z
Dock  
o
n
e
3
remote controller  
(RC-691M)  
Z
o
n
e
2
R
Tape  
ec  
eive  
r
/A  
M
Sleep  
P
Remote  
indicator  
To learn more commands, repeat  
steps 2 and 3.  
4
On  
Standby  
TV  
Input  
1
DVD  
1
VCR  
/
DVR  
CBL  
/
SAT  
Press any Remote Mode button when  
you’ve finished.  
+
TV CH  
-
2
AUX 1  
5
3
AUX 2  
6
Game/TV  
4
Tape  
7
Tuner  
8
CD  
9
Notes:  
TV VOL  
Phono  
D.TUN  
• The following buttons cannot learn new commands:  
Remote Mode, Macro [1], [2], [3], TV CH [+]/[–],  
Re-EQ, Light.  
+10  
-- --- 10  
/
Clear  
0
11  
12  
Input Selector  
Macro  
Zone  
3
2
1
2
3
Remote Mode  
• When you want to learn the command from your TV’s  
Power button, select the TV remote control mode and  
use the remote controller’s [Standby] button to learn  
the command. In the TV remote control mode, the  
remote controller’s [Standby] and TV [9] buttons  
are linked, so using the [Standby] button to learn the  
command will mean that you can also use the TV  
[9] button to turn your TV on or off in TV remote  
control mode.  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
Zone  
CDR/MD  
1, 4  
TV  
Cable  
SAT  
Receiver  
Tape/AMP  
Sleep  
Dock  
Dimmer  
+
CH  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
Album  
-
• When you want to learn the commands from your  
TV’s Channel Up and Down buttons, select the TV  
remote control mode and use the remote controller’s  
CH [+/–] button (left to the [Enter] button) to learn the  
commands. In the TV remote control mode, the  
remote controller’s CH [+/–] and TV CH [+]/[–] but-  
tons are linked, so using the CH [+/–] button to learn  
these commands will mean that you can also use the  
TV CH [+]/[–] buttons to change channels in TV  
remote control mode.  
While holding down the Remote  
Mode button for the mode in  
which you want to use the com-  
mand, press the [On] button.  
The Remote indicator lights up.  
1
• The remote controller can learn approximately 70 to  
90 commands, although this will be less if commands  
that use a lot of memory are learned.  
• Remote controller buttons such as Play, Stop, Pause,  
and so on are preprogrammed with commands for  
controlling Integra/Onkyo CD players, cassette decks,  
and DVD players. However, they can learn new com-  
mands, and you can restore the preprogrammed com-  
mands at any time by resetting the remote controller  
(see page 138).  
• To overwrite a previously learned command, repeat  
this procedure.  
• Only commands from infrared remote controllers can  
be learned.  
Press the button you want to  
learn the new command.  
2
3
Point the remote controllers at  
each other, about 2 to 6 inches  
(5–15 cm) apart, and then press  
and hold the button whose com-  
mand you want to learn until the  
Remote indicator flashes.  
• When the remote controller’s batteries expire, all  
learned commands will be lost and will have to be  
learned all over again, so don’t discard your other  
remote controllers.  
140  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Controlling Other Components—Continued  
Using Macros  
Press the buttons whose actions  
you want to program into the  
macro in the order you want  
them performed.  
For the CD example in the left column,  
you’d press the following buttons:  
[On], [CD] Input Selector, [CD]  
Remote Mode, Play [1].  
2
You can program the remote controller’s Macro buttons  
to perform a sequence of remote control actions.  
Example:  
To play a CD you typically need to perform the follow-  
ing actions:  
1. Press the [Receiver] Remote Mode button to select  
the Receiver remote controller mode.  
2. Press the [On] button to turn on the AV controller.  
3. Press the [CD] Input Selector button to select the  
CD input source.  
When you’ve finished, press the  
Macro button again.  
The Remote indicator flashes twice.  
If you enter eight commands, the pro-  
cess will finish automatically.  
3
4. Press the [CD] Remote Mode button to select the  
CD remote controller mode.  
5. Press the Play [1] button to start playback on  
the CD player.  
Note:  
If any of the buttons you used to make a macro are taught  
new commands, the macro will no longer work properly  
and will have to be made again.  
You can program a Macro button so that all five actions  
are performed with just one button press.  
Running Macros  
Making Macros  
Each Macro button can store one macro, and each macro  
can contain up to eight commands.  
Press the Macro [1], [2], or [3]  
button.  
The commands in the macro are trans-  
mitted in the order in which they were  
programmed. Keep the remote control-  
ler pointed at the AV controller until all  
of the commands have been transmit-  
ted.  
Remote  
indicator  
On  
Standby  
TV  
Input  
DVD  
1
VCR  
/
DVR  
CBL/SAT  
2
AUX 1  
5
3
+
TV CH  
-
AUX 2  
6
Game/TV  
4
Tape  
7
Tuner  
8
CD  
9
Macros can be run at any time, regard-  
less of the current remote controller  
mode.  
TV VOL  
Phono  
D.TUN  
+10  
-- --- 10  
/
Clear  
0
11  
12  
Macro  
1, 2, 3  
Input Selector  
Macro  
Zone  
3
2
1
2
3
Remote Mode  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
Zone  
Deleting Macros  
CDR/MD  
Remote  
Mode  
TV  
Cable  
SAT  
Dock  
Receiver  
Tape/AMP  
Sleep  
Receiver  
Dimmer  
While holding down the  
1
[Receiver] Remote Mode button,  
press the Macro button whose  
macro you want to delete.  
While holding down the Remote  
Mode button of the remote con-  
troller mode you want to use at  
the start of the macro, press  
Macro button [1], [2], or [3].  
The Remote indicator lights up.  
1
Press the Macro button again.  
2
For the CD example in the left column,  
you’d press and hold the [Receiver]  
Remote Mode button, and then press  
Macro button [1], [2], or [3].  
141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Troubleshooting  
If you have any trouble using the AV controller, look for  
a solution in this section. If you can’t resolve the issue  
yourself, contact the dealer from whom you purchased  
this unit.  
• The input signal format is set to PCM or DTS. Set it to  
“Auto” (page 129).  
• If there’s no sound from a DVD player connected to an  
HDMI IN, check the DVD player’s output settings,  
and be sure to select a supported audio format.  
• Make sure that none of the connecting cables are bent,  
twisted, or damaged.  
If you can’t resolve the issue yourself, try resetting  
the AV controller before contacting the dealer from  
whom you purchased this unit.  
To reset the AV controller to its factory defaults,  
turn it on and, while holding down the [VCR/DVR]  
button, press the [On/Standby] button. “Clear”  
will appear on the display and the AV controller  
will enter Standby mode.  
Only the front speakers produce sound  
• When the Stereo listening mode is selected, only the  
front speakers and subwoofer produce sound.  
• In the Mono listening mode, only the front speakers  
output sound if the “Output Speaker” setting is set to  
“L/R” (page 114).  
• Check the Speaker Configuration (page 104).  
Only the center speaker produces sound  
• If you use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie, Dolby Pro  
Logic IIx Music, or Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game listen-  
ing mode with a mono source, such as an AM radio  
station or mono TV program, the sound is concen-  
trated in the center speaker.  
VCR/DVR  
Note that resetting the AV controller will delete your  
radio presets and custom settings.  
• In the Mono listening mode, only the front speakers  
output sound if the “Output Speaker” setting is set to  
“C” (page 114).  
Power  
Can’t turn on the AV controller  
• Make sure that the power cord is properly plugged into  
the wall outlet.  
• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet, wait 5  
seconds or more, then plug it in again.  
• Check the Speaker Configuration (page 104).  
The surround speakers produce no sound  
• When the Stereo or Mono listening mode is selected,  
• Depending on the source and the current listening  
mode, not much sound may be produced by the sur-  
round speakers. Try another listening mode (page 90).  
• Make sure the speakers are configured correctly  
(page 104).  
Audio  
There’s no sound or it’s very quiet  
• Make sure that your multichannel power amplifier is  
turned on and set up correctly and connected to the AV  
controller properly (page 21).  
• Make sure that the digital input source is selected  
properly (page 53).  
The center speaker produces no sound  
• When the Stereo listening mode is selected, the center  
speaker produces no sound.  
• Make sure that the correct audio input is selected  
(page 129).  
• Make sure that all audio connecting plugs are pushed  
in all the way (page 28).  
• In the Mono listening mode, only the front speakers  
output sound if the “Output Speaker” setting is set to  
“L/R” (page 114).  
• Make sure the speakers are configured correctly  
(page 104).  
• Check the volume. It can be set to dB, 81.5 dB  
through +18.0 dB (page 64). The AV controller is  
designed for home theater enjoyment. It has a wide  
volume range, allowing precise adjustment.  
• If the MUTING indicator is flashing on the display,  
press the remote controller’s [Muting] button to  
unmute the AV controller (page 65).  
• While a pair of headphones is connected to the Phones  
jack, no sound is output by the speakers (page 66).  
• Check the digital audio output setting on the con-  
nected device. On some game consoles, such as those  
that support DVD, the default setting is off.  
• With some DVD-Video discs, you need to select an  
audio output format from a menu.  
The surround back speakers produce no sound  
The surround back speakers are not used with all lis-  
tening modes. Select another listening mode (page 90).  
• Not much sound may be produced by the surround  
back speakers with some sources.  
Make sure the speakers are configured correctly (page 104).  
The subwoofer produces no sound  
• When you play source material that contains no infor-  
mation in the LFE channel, the subwoofer produces  
no sound.  
Make sure the speakers are configured correctly (page 104).  
The Zone 2/3 speakers produce no sound  
• The Zone 2/3 speakers only output sources that are  
connected to an analog input. Check to see if the  
source component is connected to an analog input.  
• If your turntable uses an MC cartridge, you must use  
an MC head amp or MC transformer (page 41).  
• Check the speaker settings (pages 104–110).  
142  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting—Continued  
There’s no sound with a certain signal format  
• Check the digital audio output setting on the source  
component. On some game consoles, such as those  
that can play DVDs, the default setting is off.  
• With some DVD-Video discs, you need to select an  
audio format from a menu or with the [Audio] button  
on your DVD player’s remote controller.  
• When playing DTS program material, using the pause,  
fast forward, or fast reverse function on your player  
may produce a short audible noise. This is not a mal-  
function.  
The beginning of audio received by an HDMI IN  
can’t be heard  
• Since it takes longer to identify the format of an  
HDMI signal than it does for other digital audio sig-  
nals, sound may not be output immediately.  
• Depending on the input signal, some listening modes  
cannot be selected (pages 91-96).  
The volume cannot be set as required (The vol-  
ume cannot be set to +18.0 dB)  
Video  
• Check to see if a maximum volume has been set  
(page 123).  
• After the Automatic Speaker Setup function has been  
run, or the volume level of each individual speaker has  
been adjusted (pages 65 and 108), the maximum vol-  
ume may be reduced.  
There’s no picture  
• Make sure that all video connecting plugs are pushed  
in all the way (page 28).  
• Make sure that each video component is properly con-  
nected (pages 31-43).  
• On your TV, make sure that the video input to which  
the AV controller is connected is selected.  
• If your TV is connected to the HDMI output, set the  
“Monitor Out” setting to “HDMI Main” or “HDMI  
Sub” (page 46), and select “- - -” in the “Video Input  
and component video sources.  
Noise can be heard  
• Using cable ties to bundle audio cables with power  
cords, speaker cables, and so on can degrade audio  
performance, so don’t use them.  
• An audio cable may be picking up interference. Try  
repositioning your cables.  
• If your TV is connected to the COMPONENT VIDEO  
MONITOR OUT 1 or 2, set the “Monitor Out” setting  
to “Analog” (page 49), and select “- - -” in the “Com-  
ponent Video Setup” on page 52 to watch composite  
video and S-Video sources.  
• If the video source is connected to a component video  
input, you must assign that input to an input selector  
(page 52), and your TV must be connected to either  
the HDMI OUT or COMPONENT VIDEO MONI-  
TOR OUT 1 or 2 (pages 31 and 37).  
The Late Night function doesn’t work  
• Make sure the source material is Dolby Digital, Dolby  
Digital Plus, and Dolby TrueHD (page 117).  
The DVD analog multichannel input doesn’t  
work  
• Check the DVD multichannel input connections  
(page 33).  
• Make sure that the multichannel input is assigned to  
the input selector (page 54).  
• Make sure that the multichannel input is selected  
(page 129).  
• Make sure that the “Speaker Type” is not set to  
“Bi-Amp”. The multichannel DVD input cannot be  
used if “Speaker Type” is set to “Bi-Amp” (page 55).  
• Check the audio output settings on your DVD player.  
• If the video source is connected to an HDMI input,  
you must assign that input to an input selector  
(page 50), and your TV must be connected to the  
HDMI OUT (page 37).  
There’s no picture from a source connected to  
an HDMI IN  
• When the “Monitor Out” setting is set to “Analog”,  
and the “Resolution” setting is set to anything other  
than “Through” (see page 50), no video is output by  
the HDMI OUT.  
• If the message “Resolution Error” appears on the AV  
controller’s display, this indicates that your TV does  
not support the current video resolution and you need  
to select another resolution on your DVD player.  
About DTS signals  
When DTS program material ends and the DTS bit-  
stream stops, the AV controller remains in DTS listen-  
ing mode and the DTS indicator remains on. This is to  
prevent noise when you use the pause, fast forward, or  
fast reverse function on your player. If you switch your  
player from DTS to PCM, because the AV controller  
does not switch formats immediately, you may not hear  
any sound, in which case you should stop your player  
for about three seconds, and then resume playback.  
The onscreen menus don’t appear  
• If your TV is connected to the analog outputs, set the  
• On your TV, make sure that the video input to which  
the AV controller is connected is selected.  
• With some CD players, you won’t be able to playback  
DTS material properly even though your player is  
connected to a digital input on the AV controller. This  
is usually because the DTS bitstream has been pro-  
cessed (e.g., output level, sampling rate, or frequency  
response changed) and the AV controller doesn’t rec-  
ognize it as a genuine DTS signal. In such cases, you  
may hear noise.  
On non-North American models, specify the TV system  
used in your area in the “TV Format Setup  
(not North American models)” on page 56.  
143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting—Continued  
The immediate display does not appear  
• The immediate display will not appear when the input  
signal from the COMPONENT VIDEO IN is output to  
a device connected to the COMPONENT VIDEO  
MONITOR OUT.  
• If you’ve connected an u-capable Onkyo MD  
recorder, CD recorder, u Dock to the TAPE IN/OUT  
jacks, or an u Dock to the AUX 1 jacks, for the  
remote controller to work properly, you must set the  
display to MD, CDR, or DOCK (page 57).  
If you cannot operate it, you will need to enter the  
appropriate remote control code (page 137).  
• The entered remote control code may not be correct. If  
more than one code is listed, try each one.  
• Depending on the input signal, the immediate display  
may not appear when the input signal from the HDMI  
IN is output to a device connected to the HDMI OUT.  
• If none of the codes work, use the Learning function  
to learn the commands of the other component’s  
remote controller (page 140).  
• With some AV components, certain buttons may not  
work as expected, and some may not work at all.  
• To control an Integra/Onkyo component that’s con-  
nected via u, point the remote controller at the AV  
controller. Be sure to enter the appropriate remote  
control code first (page 138).  
• To control an Integra/Onkyo component that’s not  
connected via u, or another manufacturer’s compo-  
nent, point the remote controller at that component. Be  
sure to enter the appropriate remote control code first  
(page 137).  
Tuner  
Reception is noisy, FM stereo reception is  
noisy, or the FM STEREO indicator doesn’t  
appear  
• Relocate your antenna.  
Move the AV controller away from your TV or com-  
puter.  
• Listen to the station in mono (page 67).  
• When listening to an AM station, operating the remote  
controller may cause noise.  
• Passing cars and airplanes can cause interference.  
• Concrete walls weaken radio signals.  
• If nothing improves the reception, install an outdoor  
antenna.  
Can’t learn commands from another remote  
controller  
• When learning commands, make sure that the trans-  
mitting ends of both remote controllers are pointing at  
each other.  
• Are you trying to learn from a remote controller that  
cannot be used for learning? Some commands cannot  
be learned, especially those that contain several  
instructions.  
Remote Controller  
The remote controller doesn’t work  
• Make sure that the batteries are installed with the cor-  
rect polarity (page 15).  
• Make sure that the remote controller is not too far  
away from the AV controller, and that there’s no  
obstruction between the remote controller and the AV  
controller’s remote control sensor (page 15).  
• Make sure you’ve selected the correct remote control-  
ler mode (page 16).  
Recording  
Can’t record  
• On your recorder, make sure the correct input is  
selected.  
• To prevent signal loops and damage to the AV control-  
ler, input signals are not fed through to outputs with  
the same name (e.g., TAPE IN to TAPE OUT or  
VCR/DVR IN to VCR/DVR OUT).  
• Make sure you’ve entered the correct remote control  
code (page 137).  
• Install new batteries. Don’t mix different types of bat-  
teries, or old and new batteries (page 15).  
• Make sure that the AV controller is not subjected to  
direct sunshine or inverter-type fluorescent lights.  
Relocate if necessary.  
If the AV controller is installed in a rack or cabinet with  
colored-glass doors, the remote controller may not work  
reliably when the doors are closed.  
Zone 2/Zone 3  
There’s no sound  
• Only components connected to analog inputs can be  
played in Zone 2 and Zone 3.  
• When using the remote controller to control other  
manufacturers’ AV components, some buttons may  
not work as expected.  
• Make sure to set the same ID on both the AV controller  
and remote controller (page 125).  
Can’t control other components  
• If it’s an Onkyo component, make sure that the u  
cable and analog audio cable are connected properly.  
Connecting only an u cable won’t work (page 44).  
• Make sure you’ve selected the correct remote control-  
ler mode (page 16).  
144  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting—Continued  
Others  
The sound changes when I connect my head-  
phones  
• When a pair of headphones is connected, the listening  
mode is set to Stereo, unless it’s already set to Stereo,  
Mono, or Direct.  
The speaker volume cannot be set as required  
• When the Automatic Speaker Setup function is used,  
or the volume is adjusted on the onscreen setup  
menus, the maximum possible volume setting may  
change.  
The speaker distance cannot be set as required  
• In some cases, corrected values suitable for home the-  
ater use may be set automatically.  
How do I change the language of a multiplex  
source  
• On the “Audio Adjust” menu, change the “Multiplex”  
The u functions don’t work  
• To use u, you must make an u connection and an  
analog audio connection (RCA) between the compo-  
nent and AV controller, even if they are connected dig-  
itally (page 44).  
• While Zone 2 or Zone 3 is selected, the u functions  
don’t work.  
The functions Auto Power On/Standby and  
Direct Change don’t work for components con-  
nected via u  
• These functions don’t work when Zone 2 is turned on.  
When performing “Automatic Speaker Setup”,  
the measurement fails showing the message  
“Ambient noise is too high”.  
• This can be caused by any malfunction in your speaker  
unit. Check if the unit produces normal sounds.  
The AV controller contains a microcomputer for signal  
processing and control functions. In very rare situations,  
severe interference, noise from an external source, or  
static electricity may cause it to lockup. In the unlikely  
event that this happens, unplug the power cord from the  
wall outlet, wait at least 5 seconds, and then plug it back  
in again.  
Onkyo is not responsible for damages (such as CD  
rental fees) due to unsuccessful recordings caused by  
this unit’s malfunction. Before you record important  
data, make sure that the material will be recorded cor-  
rectly.  
For North American model, set the AV controller to  
Standby before disconnecting the power cord from the  
wall outlet. For other models, set the AV controller to  
Standby and the POWER switch to OFF before discon-  
necting the power cord.  
145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Video Resolution Chart  
The following tables show how video signals at different resolutions are output by the AV controller.  
: Output  
NTSC  
Output  
*1  
COMPONENT  
S-VIDEO COMPOSITE  
HDMI  
Input  
HDMI  
1080p 1080i 720p 480p  
480i 1080i 720p 480p  
480i  
480i  
480i  
1080p  
1080i  
720p  
480p  
480i  
1080i  
720p  
480p  
COMPONENT  
*2  
*2  
*2  
*2  
*2  
*2  
*2  
*2  
480i  
480i  
480i  
S-VIDEO  
COMPOSITE  
PAL  
Output  
*1  
COMPONENT  
S-VIDEO COMPOSITE  
HDMI  
Input  
HDMI  
1080p 1080i 720p 576p  
576i 1080i 720p 576p  
576i  
576i  
576i  
1080p  
1080i  
720p  
576p  
576i  
1080i  
720p  
576p  
COMPONENT  
*2  
*2  
*2  
*2  
*2  
*2  
*2  
*2  
576i  
576i  
576i  
S-VIDEO  
COMPOSITE  
*1 The video signal is output only when the “Monitor Out” setting is set to “HDMI Main” or “HDMI Sub”.  
*2 The output is limited to 480p for an effective signal in the effect of Macrovision.  
: The video signal is output only when the “Monitor Out” setting is set to “Analog”.  
: The video signal will be output only when the “Monitor Out” setting is set to “Analog” and the “Resolu-  
tion” setting is set to “Through”.  
146  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
Amplifier Section  
General  
THD (Total Harmonic  
Distortion)  
Input Sensitivity and  
Impedance  
Power Supply  
North American:  
Australian:  
Power Consumption  
North American:  
Australian:  
0.05% (Power Rated)  
AC 120 V, 60 Hz  
AC 220-240 V, 50/60 Hz  
200 mV/ 47 k(LINE)  
2.5 mV/47 k(PHONO MM)  
1.1 A  
85 W  
Output Level and  
Impedance  
Phono Overload  
Frequency Response  
Tone Control  
200 mV/ 470 (REC OUT)  
70 mV (MM 1 kHz, 0.5%)  
5 Hz–100 kHz/ +1 dB–3 dB (Direct mode)  
10 dB, 20 Hz (BASS)  
Dimensions  
(W × H × D)  
435 × 194 × 444.5 mm  
17-1/8"  
13.3 kg  
×
7-5/8"× 17-1/2"  
Weight  
10 dB, 20 kHz (TREBLE)  
29.3 lbs.  
Signal to Noise Ratio  
110 dB (LINE, IHF-A)  
80 dB (PHONO, IHF-A)  
Video Input  
HDMI  
Component  
S-Video  
IN 1, IN 2, IN 3, IN 4  
IN 1 (DVD), IN 2, IN 3  
DVD, VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT,  
GAME/TV, AUX 1, AUX 2  
DVD, VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT,  
GAME/TV, AUX 1, AUX 2  
Video Section  
Input Sensitivity/Output  
Level and Impedance  
1 Vp-p /75 Ω  
(Component and S-Video Y)  
0.7 Vp-p /75 (Component Pb/Cb,Pr/Cr)  
0.28 Vp-p /75 (S-Video C)  
1 Vp-p /75 (Composite)  
Composite  
Video Output  
HDMI  
Component  
OUT MAIN, OUT SUB  
MONITOR OUT 1,  
MONITOR OUT 2/ZONE 2 OUT  
Component Video  
Frequency Response  
5 Hz – 100 MHz, –3 dB  
S-Video  
VCR/DVR OUT, MONITOR OUT  
Tuner Section  
Composite  
VCR/DVR OUT, MONITOR OUT,  
ZONE 2 OUT  
FM  
Audio Inputs  
Tuning Frequency Range  
North American:  
Australian:  
Digital Inputs  
OPTICAL: 2 (Rear), 1 (Front)  
COAXIAL: 3 (Rear)  
87.5 MHz– 107.9 MHz  
87.50 MHz– 108.00 MHz, RDS  
Analog Inputs  
MULTI CH (FRONT, CENTER,  
SUBWOOFER, SURR, SURR BACK),  
DVD, VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT,  
GAME/TV, AUX 1, TAPE, CD,  
PHONO, AUX 2  
BALANCE L, BALANCE R  
7.1  
AM  
Tuning Frequency Range  
North American:  
Australian:  
530 kHz–1710 kHz  
522 kHz–1611 kHz  
40  
Balance Inputs  
Multichannel Inputs  
Preset Channel  
Audio Outputs  
Digital Output  
Analog Outputs  
Digital Tuner  
North American:  
OPTICAL: 1 (Rear)  
XM, SIRIUS, HD RADIO  
VCR/DVR OUT, TAPE OUT, PRE OUT  
(FRONT, CENTER, SUBWOOFER,  
SURR, SURR BACK, ZONE 2, ZONE 3)  
Balance Pre Outputs  
FL, FR, C, SL, SR, SBL, SBR, SW  
Multichannel Pre  
Outputs  
Subwoofer Pre Outputs  
Phones  
7
1
1
Control Terminal  
MIC  
Yes  
RS232  
1
Ether  
1 (e-control)  
IR Input/Output  
12 V Trigger Out  
2/1  
3
Specifications and features are subject to change without  
notice.  
147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Integra Division of  
ONKYO U.S.A. CORPORATION  
18 park Way, Upper Saddle River, N.J. 07458, U.S.A.  
E
n
Integra Division of  
ONKYO CORPORATION  
Sales & Product Planning Div.: 2-1, Nisshin-cho, Neyagawa-shi, OSAKA 572-8540, JAPAN  
Tel: 072-831-8023 Fax: 072-831-8163  
Y0810-2  
SN 29344765A  
(C) Copyright 2008 ONKYO CORPORATION Japan. All rights reserved.  
* 2 9 3 4 4 7 6 5 A *  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Insignia Car Satellite TV System NS 42L260A13 User Manual
Insignia Flat Panel Television NS 40L240A13 User Manual
Intellinet Network Solutions Network Router 503693 User Manual
Invacare Camping Equipment BariatricBed User Manual
Jenn Air Convection Oven 81t2P180_60 User Manual
JVC Car Stereo System Model KS FX200 User Manual
JVC DVR DR MV5BEK User Manual
Kathrein Power Supply NCF 13 User Manual
Keys Fitness Home Gym KPS LEGA User Manual
Klipsch Headphones S3M User Manual